<?xml version="1.0"?><Statute bill-origin="commons" bill-type="govt-public" xml:lang="en" in-force="yes" startdate="20051212"><Identification Code="id=&quot;&quot;" hasPreviousVersion="true"><LongTitle Code="id=&quot;&quot;,lt=&quot;&quot;">An Act respecting copyright</LongTitle><ShortTitle status="official" Code="id=&quot;&quot;,st=&quot;&quot;">Copyright Act</ShortTitle><RunningHead>Copyright</RunningHead><BillHistory><Stages stage="consolidation"><Date><YYYY>2012</YYYY><MM>01</MM><DD>19</DD></Date></Stages></BillHistory><Chapter Code="id=&quot;&quot;,ch=&quot;&quot;"><ConsolidatedNumber official="yes" Code="id=&quot;&quot;,ch=&quot;&quot;,cn=&quot;&quot;">C-42</ConsolidatedNumber></Chapter></Identification><Body><Heading Code="ga=&quot;s_1&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="1"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;s_1&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">SHORT TITLE</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Short title</MarginalNote><Label>1.</Label><Text>This Act may be cited as the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="C-42">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., c. C-30, s. 1.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;s_2&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="1"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;s_2&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">INTERPRETATION</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Definitions</MarginalNote><Label>2.</Label><Text>In this Act,</Text><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{architectural work}{oeuvre architecturale}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{architectural work}{oeuvre architecturale}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>architectural work</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{architectural work}{oeuvre architecturale}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>oeuvre architecturale</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>architectural work</DefinedTermEn> means any building or structure or any model of a building or structure;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{}{}&quot;"><Text><DefinedTermEn>architectural work of art</DefinedTermEn><Repealed>[Repealed, 1993, c. 44, s. 53]</Repealed></Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{artistic work}{oeuvre artistique}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{artistic work}{oeuvre artistique}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>artistic work</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{artistic work}{oeuvre artistique}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>oeuvre artistique</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>artistic work</DefinedTermEn> includes paintings, drawings, maps, charts, plans, photographs, engravings, sculptures, works of artistic craftsmanship, architectural works, and compilations of artistic works;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{Berne Convention country}{pays partie à la Convention de Berne}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{Berne Convention country}{pays partie à la Convention de Berne}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>Berne Convention country</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{Berne Convention country}{pays partie à la Convention de Berne}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>pays partie à la Convention de Berne</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>Berne Convention country</DefinedTermEn> means a country that is a party to the Convention for the Protection of Literary and Artistic Works concluded at Berne on September 9, 1886, or any one of its revisions, including the Paris Act of 1971;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{Board}{Commission}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{Board}{Commission}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>Board</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{Board}{Commission}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>Commission</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>Board</DefinedTermEn> means the Copyright Board established by subsection 66(1);</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{book}{livre}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{book}{livre}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>book</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{book}{livre}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>livre</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>book</DefinedTermEn> means a volume or a part or division of a volume, in printed form, but does not include</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{book}{livre}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a pamphlet,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{book}{livre}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a newspaper, review, magazine or other periodical,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{book}{livre}&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a map, chart, plan or sheet music where the map, chart, plan or sheet music is separately published, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{book}{livre}&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>an instruction or repair manual that accompanies a product or that is supplied as an accessory to a service;</Text></Paragraph></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{broadcaster}{radiodiffuseur}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{broadcaster}{radiodiffuseur}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>broadcaster</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{broadcaster}{radiodiffuseur}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>radiodiffuseur</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>broadcaster</DefinedTermEn> means a body that, in the course of operating a broadcasting undertaking, broadcasts a communication signal in accordance with the law of the country in which the broadcasting undertaking is carried on, but excludes a body whose primary activity in relation to communication signals is their retransmission;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{choreographic work}{oeuvre chorégraphique}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{choreographic work}{oeuvre chorégraphique}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>choreographic work</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{choreographic work}{oeuvre chorégraphique}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>oeuvre chorégraphique</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>choreographic work</DefinedTermEn> includes any work of choreography, whether or not it has any story line;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{}{}&quot;"><Text><DefinedTermEn>cinematograph</DefinedTermEn><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 1]</Repealed></Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{cinematographic work}{oeuvre cinématographique}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{cinematographic work}{oeuvre cinématographique}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>cinematographic work</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{cinematographic work}{oeuvre cinématographique}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>oeuvre cinématographique</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>cinematographic work</DefinedTermEn> includes any work expressed by any process analogous to cinematography, whether or not accompanied by a soundtrack;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{collective society}{société de gestion}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{collective society}{société de gestion}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>collective society</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{collective society}{société de gestion}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>société de gestion</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>collective society</DefinedTermEn> means a society, association or corporation that carries on the business of collective administration of copyright or of the remuneration right conferred by section 19 or 81 for the benefit of those who, by assignment, grant of licence, appointment of it as their agent or otherwise, authorize it to act on their behalf in relation to that collective administration, and</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{collective society}{société de gestion}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>operates a licensing scheme, applicable in relation to a repertoire of works, performer’s performances, sound recordings or communication signals of more than one author, performer, sound recording maker or broadcaster, pursuant to which the society, association or corporation sets out classes of uses that it agrees to authorize under this Act, and the royalties and terms and conditions on which it agrees to authorize those classes of uses, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{collective society}{société de gestion}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>carries on the business of collecting and distributing royalties or levies payable pursuant to this Act;</Text></Paragraph></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{collective work}{recueil}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{collective work}{recueil}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>collective work</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{collective work}{recueil}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>recueil</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>collective work</DefinedTermEn> means</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{collective work}{recueil}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>an encyclopaedia, dictionary, year book or similar work,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{collective work}{recueil}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a newspaper, review, magazine or similar periodical, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{collective work}{recueil}&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>any work written in distinct parts by different authors, or in which works or parts of works of different authors are incorporated;</Text></Paragraph></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{commercially available}{accessible sur le marché}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{commercially available}{accessible sur le marché}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>commercially available</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{commercially available}{accessible sur le marché}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>accessible sur le marché</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>commercially available</DefinedTermEn> means, in relation to a work or other subject-matter,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{commercially available}{accessible sur le marché}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>available on the Canadian market within a reasonable time and for a reasonable price and may be located with reasonable effort, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{commercially available}{accessible sur le marché}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>for which a licence to reproduce, perform in public or communicate to the public by telecommunication is available from a collective society within a reasonable time and for a reasonable price and may be located with reasonable effort;</Text></Paragraph></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{communication signal}{signal de communication}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{communication signal}{signal de communication}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>communication signal</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{communication signal}{signal de communication}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>signal de communication</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>communication signal</DefinedTermEn> means radio waves transmitted through space without any artificial guide, for reception by the public;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{compilation}{compilation}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{compilation}{compilation}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>compilation</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{compilation}{compilation}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>compilation</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>compilation</DefinedTermEn> means</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{compilation}{compilation}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a work resulting from the selection or arrangement of literary, dramatic, musical or artistic works or of parts thereof, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{compilation}{compilation}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a work resulting from the selection or arrangement of data;</Text></Paragraph></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{computer program}{programme d’ordinateur}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{computer program}{programme d’ordinateur}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>computer program</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{computer program}{programme d’ordinateur}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>programme d’ordinateur</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>computer program</DefinedTermEn> means a set of instructions or statements, expressed, fixed, embodied or stored in any manner, that is to be used directly or indirectly in a computer in order to bring about a specific result;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{copyright}{droit d’auteur}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{copyright}{droit d’auteur}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>copyright</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{copyright}{droit d’auteur}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>droit d’auteur</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>copyright</DefinedTermEn> means the rights described in</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{copyright}{droit d’auteur}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>section 3, in the case of a work,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{copyright}{droit d’auteur}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>sections 15 and 26, in the case of a performer’s performance,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{copyright}{droit d’auteur}&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>section 18, in the case of a sound recording, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{copyright}{droit d’auteur}&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>section 21, in the case of a communication signal;</Text></Paragraph></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{country}{pays}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{country}{pays}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>country</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{country}{pays}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>pays</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>country</DefinedTermEn> includes any territory;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{defendant}{}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{defendant}{}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>defendant</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{defendant}{}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinitionEnOnly>Version anglaise seulement</DefinitionEnOnly></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>defendant</DefinedTermEn> includes a respondent to an application;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{}{}&quot;"><Text><DefinedTermEn>delivery</DefinedTermEn><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 1]</Repealed></Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{dramatic work}{oeuvre dramatique}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{dramatic work}{oeuvre dramatique}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>dramatic work</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{dramatic work}{oeuvre dramatique}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>oeuvre dramatique</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>dramatic work</DefinedTermEn> includes</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{dramatic work}{oeuvre dramatique}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>any piece for recitation, choreographic work or mime, the scenic arrangement or acting form of which is fixed in writing or otherwise,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{dramatic work}{oeuvre dramatique}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>any cinematographic work, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{dramatic work}{oeuvre dramatique}&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>any compilation of dramatic works;</Text></Paragraph></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{educational institution}{établissement d’enseignement}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{educational institution}{établissement d’enseignement}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>educational institution</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{educational institution}{établissement d’enseignement}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>établissement d’enseignement</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>educational institution</DefinedTermEn> means</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{educational institution}{établissement d’enseignement}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a non-profit institution licensed or recognized by or under an Act of Parliament or the legislature of a province to provide pre-school, elementary, secondary or post-secondary education,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{educational institution}{établissement d’enseignement}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a non-profit institution that is directed or controlled by a board of education regulated by or under an Act of the legislature of a province and that provides continuing, professional or vocational education or training,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{educational institution}{établissement d’enseignement}&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a department or agency of any order of government, or any non-profit body, that controls or supervises education or training referred to in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) or (<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>), or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{educational institution}{établissement d’enseignement}&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>any other non-profit institution prescribed by regulation;</Text></Paragraph></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{engravings}{gravure}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{engravings}{gravure}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>engravings</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{engravings}{gravure}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>gravure</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>engravings</DefinedTermEn> includes etchings, lithographs, woodcuts, prints and other similar works, not being photographs;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{every original literary, dramatic, musical and artistic work}{toute oeuvre littéraire, dramatique, musicale ou artistique originale}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{every original literary, dramatic, musical and artistic work}{toute oeuvre littéraire, dramatique, musicale ou artistique originale}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>every original literary, dramatic, musical and artistic work</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{every original literary, dramatic, musical and artistic work}{toute oeuvre littéraire, dramatique, musicale ou artistique originale}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>toute oeuvre littéraire, dramatique, musicale ou artistique originale</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>every original literary, dramatic, musical and artistic work</DefinedTermEn> includes every original production in the literary, scientific or artistic domain, whatever may be the mode or form of its expression, such as compilations, books, pamphlets and other writings, lectures, dramatic or dramatico-musical works, musical works, translations, illustrations, sketches and plastic works relative to geography, topography, architecture or science;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{exclusive distributor}{distributeur exclusif}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{exclusive distributor}{distributeur exclusif}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>exclusive distributor</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{exclusive distributor}{distributeur exclusif}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>distributeur exclusif</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>exclusive distributor</DefinedTermEn> means, in relation to a book, a person who</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{exclusive distributor}{distributeur exclusif}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>has, before or after the coming into force of this definition, been appointed in writing, by the owner or exclusive licensee of the copyright in the book in Canada, as</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{exclusive distributor}{distributeur exclusif}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>the only distributor of the book in Canada or any part of Canada, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{exclusive distributor}{distributeur exclusif}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>the only distributor of the book in Canada or any part of Canada in respect of a particular sector of the market, and</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{exclusive distributor}{distributeur exclusif}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>meets the criteria established by regulations made under section 2.6,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedDefinition><Text>and, for greater certainty, if there are no regulations made under section 2.6, then no person qualifies under this definition as an “exclusive distributor”;</Text></ContinuedDefinition></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{}{}&quot;"><Text><DefinedTermEn>Her Majesty’s Realms and Territories</DefinedTermEn><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 1]</Repealed></Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{infringing}{contrefaçon}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{infringing}{contrefaçon}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>infringing</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{infringing}{contrefaçon}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>contrefaçon</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>infringing</DefinedTermEn> means</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{infringing}{contrefaçon}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in relation to a work in which copyright subsists, any copy, including any colourable imitation, made or dealt with in contravention of this Act,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{infringing}{contrefaçon}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in relation to a performer’s performance in respect of which copyright subsists, any fixation or copy of a fixation of it made or dealt with in contravention of this Act,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{infringing}{contrefaçon}&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in relation to a sound recording in respect of which copyright subsists, any copy of it made or dealt with in contravention of this Act, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{infringing}{contrefaçon}&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in relation to a communication signal in respect of which copyright subsists, any fixation or copy of a fixation of it made or dealt with in contravention of this Act.</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedDefinition><Text>The definition includes a copy that is imported in the circumstances set out in paragraph 27(2)(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>) and section 27.1 but does not otherwise include a copy made with the consent of the owner of the copyright in the country where the copy was made;</Text></ContinuedDefinition></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{lecture}{conférence}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{lecture}{conférence}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>lecture</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{lecture}{conférence}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>conférence</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>lecture</DefinedTermEn> includes address, speech and sermon;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{legal representatives}{représentants légaux}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{legal representatives}{représentants légaux}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>legal representatives</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{legal representatives}{représentants légaux}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>représentants légaux</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>legal representatives</DefinedTermEn> includes heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, or agents or attorneys who are thereunto duly authorized in writing;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{library, archive or museum}{bibliothèque, musée ou service d’archives}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{library, archive or museum}{bibliothèque, musée ou service d’archives}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>library, archive or museum</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{library, archive or museum}{bibliothèque, musée ou service d’archives}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>bibliothèque, musée ou service d’archives</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>library, archive or museum</DefinedTermEn> means</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{library, archive or museum}{bibliothèque, musée ou service d’archives}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>an institution, whether or not incorporated, that is not established or conducted for profit or that does not form a part of, or is not administered or directly or indirectly controlled by, a body that is established or conducted for profit, in which is held and maintained a collection of documents and other materials that is open to the public or to researchers, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{library, archive or museum}{bibliothèque, musée ou service d’archives}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>any other non-profit institution prescribed by regulation;</Text></Paragraph></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{literary work}{oeuvre littéraire}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{literary work}{oeuvre littéraire}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>literary work</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{literary work}{oeuvre littéraire}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>oeuvre littéraire</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>literary work</DefinedTermEn> includes tables, computer programs, and compilations of literary works;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{maker}{producteur}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{maker}{producteur}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>maker</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{maker}{producteur}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>producteur</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>maker</DefinedTermEn> means</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{maker}{producteur}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in relation to a cinematographic work, the person by whom the arrangements necessary for the making of the work are undertaken, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{maker}{producteur}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in relation to a sound recording, the person by whom the arrangements necessary for the first fixation of the sounds are undertaken;</Text></Paragraph></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{Minister}{ministre}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{Minister}{ministre}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>Minister</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{Minister}{ministre}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>ministre</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>Minister</DefinedTermEn>, except in section 44.1, means the Minister of Industry;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{moral rights}{droits moraux}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{moral rights}{droits moraux}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>moral rights</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{moral rights}{droits moraux}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>droits moraux</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>moral rights</DefinedTermEn> means the rights described in subsection 14.1(1);</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{musical work}{oeuvre musicale}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{musical work}{oeuvre musicale}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>musical work</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{musical work}{oeuvre musicale}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>oeuvre musicale</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>musical work</DefinedTermEn> means any work of music or musical composition, with or without words, and includes any compilation thereof;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{perceptual disability}{déficience perceptuelle}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{perceptual disability}{déficience perceptuelle}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>perceptual disability</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{perceptual disability}{déficience perceptuelle}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>déficience perceptuelle</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>perceptual disability</DefinedTermEn> means a disability that prevents or inhibits a person from reading or hearing a literary, musical, dramatic or artistic work in its original format, and includes such a disability resulting from</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{perceptual disability}{déficience perceptuelle}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>severe or total impairment of sight or hearing or the inability to focus or move one’s eyes,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{perceptual disability}{déficience perceptuelle}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the inability to hold or manipulate a book, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{perceptual disability}{déficience perceptuelle}&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>an impairment relating to comprehension;</Text></Paragraph></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{performance}{représentation}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{performance}{représentation}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>performance</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{performance}{représentation}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>représentation</DefinedTermFr> ou <DefinedTermFr>exécution</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>performance</DefinedTermEn> means any acoustic or visual representation of a work, performer’s performance, sound recording or communication signal, including a representation made by means of any mechanical instrument, radio receiving set or television receiving set;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{performer’s performance}{prestation}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{performer’s performance}{prestation}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>performer’s performance</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{performer’s performance}{prestation}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>prestation</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>performer’s performance</DefinedTermEn> means any of the following when done by a performer:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{performer’s performance}{prestation}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a performance of an artistic work, dramatic work or musical work, whether or not the work was previously fixed in any material form, and whether or not the work’s term of copyright protection under this Act has expired,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{performer’s performance}{prestation}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a recitation or reading of a literary work, whether or not the work’s term of copyright protection under this Act has expired, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{performer’s performance}{prestation}&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>an improvisation of a dramatic work, musical work or literary work, whether or not the improvised work is based on a pre-existing work;</Text></Paragraph></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{photograph}{photographie}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{photograph}{photographie}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>photograph</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{photograph}{photographie}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>photographie</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>photograph</DefinedTermEn> includes photo-lithograph and any work expressed by any process analogous to photography;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{plaintiff}{}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{plaintiff}{}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>plaintiff</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{plaintiff}{}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinitionEnOnly>Version anglaise seulement</DefinitionEnOnly></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>plaintiff</DefinedTermEn> includes an applicant;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{plate}{planche}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{plate}{planche}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>plate</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{plate}{planche}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>planche</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>plate</DefinedTermEn> includes</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{plate}{planche}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>any stereotype or other plate, stone, block, mould, matrix, transfer or negative used or intended to be used for printing or reproducing copies of any work, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{plate}{planche}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>any matrix or other appliance used or intended to be used for making or reproducing sound recordings, performer’s performances or communication signals;</Text></Paragraph></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{premises}{locaux}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{premises}{locaux}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>premises</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{premises}{locaux}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>locaux</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>premises</DefinedTermEn> means, in relation to an educational institution, a place where education or training referred to in the definition “educational institution” is provided, controlled or supervised by the educational institution;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{}{}&quot;"><Text><DefinedTermEn>receiving device</DefinedTermEn><Repealed>[Repealed, 1993, c. 44, s. 79]</Repealed></Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{Rome Convention country}{pays partie à la Convention de Rome}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{Rome Convention country}{pays partie à la Convention de Rome}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>Rome Convention country</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{Rome Convention country}{pays partie à la Convention de Rome}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>pays partie à la Convention de Rome</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>Rome Convention country</DefinedTermEn> means a country that is a party to the International Convention for the Protection of Performers, Producers of Phonograms and Broadcasting Organisations, done at Rome on October 26, 1961;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{sculpture}{sculpture}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{sculpture}{sculpture}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>sculpture</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{sculpture}{sculpture}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>sculpture</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>sculpture</DefinedTermEn> includes a cast or model;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{sound recording}{enregistrement sonore}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{sound recording}{enregistrement sonore}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>sound recording</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{sound recording}{enregistrement sonore}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>enregistrement sonore</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>sound recording</DefinedTermEn> means a recording, fixed in any material form, consisting of sounds, whether or not of a performance of a work, but excludes any soundtrack of a cinematographic work where it accompanies the cinematographic work;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{telecommunication}{télécommunication}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{telecommunication}{télécommunication}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>telecommunication</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{telecommunication}{télécommunication}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>télécommunication</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>telecommunication</DefinedTermEn> means any transmission of signs, signals, writing, images or sounds or intelligence of any nature by wire, radio, visual, optical or other electromagnetic system;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{treaty country}{pays signataire}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{treaty country}{pays signataire}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>treaty country</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{treaty country}{pays signataire}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>pays signataire</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>treaty country</DefinedTermEn> means a Berne Convention country, UCC country or WTO Member;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{UCC country}{pays partie à la Convention universelle}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{UCC country}{pays partie à la Convention universelle}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>UCC country</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{UCC country}{pays partie à la Convention universelle}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>pays partie à la Convention universelle</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>UCC country</DefinedTermEn> means a country that is a party to the Universal Copyright Convention, adopted on September 6, 1952 in Geneva, Switzerland, or to that Convention as revised in Paris, France on July 24, 1971;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{work}{oeuvre}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{work}{oeuvre}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>work</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{work}{oeuvre}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>oeuvre</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>work</DefinedTermEn> includes the title thereof when such title is original and distinctive;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{work of joint authorship}{oeuvre créée en collaboration}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{work of joint authorship}{oeuvre créée en collaboration}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>work of joint authorship</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{work of joint authorship}{oeuvre créée en collaboration}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>oeuvre créée en collaboration</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>work of joint authorship</DefinedTermEn> means a work produced by the collaboration of two or more authors in which the contribution of one author is not distinct from the contribution of the other author or authors;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{}{}&quot;"><Text><DefinedTermEn>work of sculpture</DefinedTermEn><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 1]</Repealed></Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{WTO Member}{membre de l’OMC}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{WTO Member}{membre de l’OMC}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>WTO Member</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2&quot;,df=&quot;{WTO Member}{membre de l’OMC}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>membre de l’OMC</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>WTO Member</DefinedTermEn> means a Member of the World Trade Organization as defined in subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="W-11.8">World Trade Organization Agreement Implementation Act</XRefExternal>.</Text></Definition><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 2;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 1;</li><li> 1988, c. 65, s. 61;</li><li> 1992, c. 1, s. 145(F);</li><li> 1993, c. 23, s. 1, c. 44, ss. 53, 79;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 56;</li><li> 1995, c. 1, s. 62;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 1.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;2.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Compilations</MarginalNote><Label>2.1</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;2.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>A compilation containing two or more of the categories of literary, dramatic, musical or artistic works shall be deemed to be a compilation of the category making up the most substantial part of the compilation.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;2.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Idem</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The mere fact that a work is included in a compilation does not increase, decrease or otherwise affect the protection conferred by this Act in respect of the copyright in the work or the moral rights in respect of the work.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1993, c. 44, s. 54.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;2.11&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2.11&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Definition of <DefinedTermEn>maker</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><Label>2.11</Label><Text>For greater certainty, the arrangements referred to in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>) of the definition <DefinedTermEn>maker</DefinedTermEn> in section 2, as that term is used in section 19 and in the definition <DefinedTermEn>eligible maker</DefinedTermEn> in section 79, include arrangements for entering into contracts with performers, financial arrangements and technical arrangements required for the first fixation of the sounds for a sound recording.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 2.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;2.2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2.2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Definition of <DefinedTermEn>publication</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><Label>2.2</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;2.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>For the purposes of this Act, <DefinedTermEn>publication</DefinedTermEn> means</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in relation to works,</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;2.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>making copies of a work available to the public,</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;2.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>the construction of an architectural work, and</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;2.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;iii&quot;"><Label>(iii)</Label><Text>the incorporation of an artistic work into an architectural work, and</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in relation to sound recordings, making copies of a sound recording available to the public,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>but does not include</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the performance in public, or the communication to the public by telecommunication, of a literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work or a sound recording, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the exhibition in public of an artistic work.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;2.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Issue of photographs and engravings</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>For the purpose of subsection (1), the issue of photographs and engravings of sculptures and architectural works is not deemed to be publication of those works.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;2.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where no consent of copyright owner</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>For the purposes of this Act, other than in respect of infringement of copyright, a work or other subject-matter is not deemed to be published or performed in public or communicated to the public by telecommunication if that act is done without the consent of the owner of the copyright.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;2.2&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2.2&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Unpublished works</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Where, in the case of an unpublished work, the making of the work is extended over a considerable period, the conditions of this Act conferring copyright are deemed to have been complied with if the author was, during any substantial part of that period, a subject or citizen of, or a person ordinarily resident in, a country to which this Act extends.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 2.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;2.3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2.3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Telecommunication</MarginalNote><Label>2.3</Label><Text>A person who communicates a work or other subject-matter to the public by telecommunication does not by that act alone perform it in public, nor by that act alone is deemed to authorize its performance in public.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 2.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;2.4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2.4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Communication to the public by telecommunication</MarginalNote><Label>2.4</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;2.4&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>For the purposes of communication to the public by telecommunication,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2.4&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>persons who occupy apartments, hotel rooms or dwelling units situated in the same building are part of the public, and a communication intended to be received exclusively by such persons is a communication to the public;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2.4&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a person whose only act in respect of the communication of a work or other subject-matter to the public consists of providing the means of telecommunication necessary for another person to so communicate the work or other subject-matter does not communicate that work or other subject-matter to the public; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2.4&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>where a person, as part of</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;2.4&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>a network, within the meaning of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="B-9.01">Broadcasting Act</XRefExternal>, whose operations result in the communication of works or other subject-matter to the public, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;2.4&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>any programming undertaking whose operations result in the communication of works or other subject-matter to the public,</Text></Subparagraph><ContinuedParagraph><Text>transmits by telecommunication a work or other subject-matter that is communicated to the public by another person who is not a retransmitter of a signal within the meaning of subsection 31(1), the transmission and communication of that work or other subject-matter by those persons constitute a single communication to the public for which those persons are jointly and severally liable.</Text></ContinuedParagraph></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;2.4&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2.4&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The Governor in Council may make regulations defining “programming undertaking” for the purpose of paragraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>).</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;2.4&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2.4&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exception</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>A work is not communicated in the manner described in paragraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>) or 3(1)(<Emphasis style="italic">f</Emphasis>) where a signal carrying the work is retransmitted to a person who is a retransmitter within the meaning of subsection 31(1).</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 2;</li><li> 2002, c. 26, s. 1.</li></ul></HistoricalNote><a startdate="20021231">Previous Version</a></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;2.5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2.5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">What constitutes rental</MarginalNote><Label>2.5</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;2.5&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>For the purposes of paragraphs 3(1)(<Emphasis style="italic">h</Emphasis>) and (<Emphasis style="italic">i</Emphasis>), 15(1)(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>) and 18(1)(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>), an arrangement, whatever its form, constitutes a rental of a computer program or sound recording if, and only if,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2.5&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>it is in substance a rental, having regard to all the circumstances; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;2.5&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>it is entered into with motive of gain in relation to the overall operations of the person who rents out the computer program or sound recording, as the case may be.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;2.5&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2.5&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Motive of gain</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>For the purpose of paragraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>), a person who rents out a computer program or sound recording with the intention of recovering no more than the costs, including overhead, associated with the rental operations does not by that act alone have a motive of gain in relation to the rental operations.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 2.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;2.6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2.6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exclusive distributor</MarginalNote><Label>2.6</Label><Text>The Governor in Council may make regulations establishing distribution criteria for the purpose of paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>) of the definition “exclusive distributor” in section 2.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 2.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;2.7&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;2.7&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exclusive licence</MarginalNote><Label>2.7</Label><Text>For the purposes of this Act, an exclusive licence is an authorization to do any act that is subject to copyright to the exclusion of all others including the copyright owner, whether the authorization is granted by the owner or an exclusive licensee claiming under the owner.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 2.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_I&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="1"><Label>PART I</Label><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_I&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">COPYRIGHT AND MORAL RIGHTS IN WORKS</TitleText></Heading><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_I&quot;,gb=&quot;s_3&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_I&quot;,gb=&quot;s_3&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Copyright</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Copyright in works</MarginalNote><Label>3.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>For the purposes of this Act, “copyright”, in relation to a work, means the sole right to produce or reproduce the work or any substantial part thereof in any material form whatever, to perform the work or any substantial part thereof in public or, if the work is unpublished, to publish the work or any substantial part thereof, and includes the sole right</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to produce, reproduce, perform or publish any translation of the work,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of a dramatic work, to convert it into a novel or other non-dramatic work,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of a novel or other non-dramatic work, or of an artistic work, to convert it into a dramatic work, by way of performance in public or otherwise,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of a literary, dramatic or musical work, to make any sound recording, cinematograph film or other contrivance by means of which the work may be mechanically reproduced or performed,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;e&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of any literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work, to reproduce, adapt and publicly present the work as a cinematographic work,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;f&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">f</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of any literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work, to communicate the work to the public by telecommunication,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;g&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">g</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to present at a public exhibition, for a purpose other than sale or hire, an artistic work created after June 7, 1988, other than a map, chart or plan,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;h&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">h</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of a computer program that can be reproduced in the ordinary course of its use, other than by a reproduction during its execution in conjunction with a machine, device or computer, to rent out the computer program, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">i</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of a musical work, to rent out a sound recording in which the work is embodied,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>and to authorize any such acts.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;3&quot;,ss=&quot;1.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;3&quot;,ss=&quot;1.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Simultaneous fixing</MarginalNote><Label>(1.1)</Label><Text>A work that is communicated in the manner described in paragraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">f</Emphasis>) is fixed even if it is fixed simultaneously with its communication.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;3&quot;,ss=&quot;1.2)&quot;"><Label>(1.2) to (4)</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 3]</Repealed></Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 3;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 2;</li><li> 1988, c. 65, s. 62;</li><li> 1993, c. 23, s. 2, c. 44, s. 55;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 3.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;4&quot;"><Label>4.</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 4]</Repealed></Text></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_I&quot;,gb=&quot;s_5&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_I&quot;,gb=&quot;s_5&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Works in which Copyright may Subsist</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Conditions for subsistence of copyright</MarginalNote><Label>5.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to this Act, copyright shall subsist in Canada, for the term hereinafter mentioned, in every original literary, dramatic, musical and artistic work if any one of the following conditions is met:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of any work, whether published or unpublished, including a cinematographic work, the author was, at the date of the making of the work, a citizen or subject of, or a person ordinarily resident in, a treaty country;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of a cinematographic work, whether published or unpublished, the maker, at the date of the making of the cinematographic work,</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>if a corporation, had its headquarters in a treaty country, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>if a natural person, was a citizen or subject of, or a person ordinarily resident in, a treaty country; or</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of a published work, including a cinematographic work,</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>in relation to subparagraph 2.2(1)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)(i), the first publication in such a quantity as to satisfy the reasonable demands of the public, having regard to the nature of the work, occurred in a treaty country, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>in relation to subparagraph 2.2(1)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)(ii) or (iii), the first publication occurred in a treaty country.</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1.01&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1.01&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Protection for older works</MarginalNote><Label>(1.01)</Label><Text>For the purposes of subsection (1), a country that becomes a Berne Convention country or a WTO Member after the date of the making or publication of a work shall, as of becoming a Berne Convention country or WTO Member, as the case may be, be deemed to have been a Berne Convention country or WTO Member at the date of the making or publication of the work, subject to subsection (1.02) and section 33.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1.02&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1.02&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation</MarginalNote><Label>(1.02)</Label><Text>Subsection (1.01) does not confer copyright protection in Canada on a work whose term of copyright protection in the country referred to in that subsection had expired before that country became a Berne Convention country or WTO Member, as the case may be.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1.03&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1.03&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application of subsections (1.01) and (1.02)</MarginalNote><Label>(1.03)</Label><Text>Subsections (1.01) and (1.02) apply, and are deemed to have applied, regardless of whether the country in question became a Berne Convention country or a WTO Member before or after the coming into force of those subsections.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">First publication</MarginalNote><Label>(1.1)</Label><Text>The first publication described in subparagraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)(i) or (ii) is deemed to have occurred in a treaty country notwithstanding that it in fact occurred previously elsewhere, if the interval between those two publications did not exceed thirty days.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1.2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;1.2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Idem</MarginalNote><Label>(1.2)</Label><Text>Copyright shall not subsist in Canada otherwise than as provided by subsection (1), except in so far as the protection conferred by this Act is extended as hereinafter provided to foreign countries to which this Act does not extend.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Minister may extend copyright to other countries</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where the Minister certifies by notice, published in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal>, that any country that is not a treaty country grants or has undertaken to grant, either by treaty, convention, agreement or law, to citizens of Canada, the benefit of copyright on substantially the same basis as to its own citizens or copyright protection substantially equal to that conferred by this Act, the country shall, for the purpose of the rights conferred by this Act, be treated as if it were a country to which this Act extends, and the Minister may give a certificate, notwithstanding that the remedies for enforcing the rights, or the restrictions on the importation of copies of works, under the law of such country, differ from those in this Act.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;2.1&quot;"><Label>(2.1)</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1994, c. 47, s. 57]</Repealed></Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;3)&quot;"><Label>(3) to (6)</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 5]</Repealed></Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;5&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Reciprocity protection preserved</MarginalNote><Label>(7)</Label><Text>For greater certainty, the protection to which a work is entitled by virtue of a notice published under subsection (2), or under that subsection as it read at any time before the coming into force of this subsection, is not affected by reason only of the country in question becoming a treaty country.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 5;</li><li> 1993, c. 15, s. 2, c. 44, s. 57;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 57;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 5;</li><li> 2001, c. 34, s. 34.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_I&quot;,gb=&quot;s_6&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_I&quot;,gb=&quot;s_6&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Term of Copyright</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Term of copyright</MarginalNote><Label>6.</Label><Text>The term for which copyright shall subsist shall, except as otherwise expressly provided by this Act, be the life of the author, the remainder of the calendar year in which the author dies, and a period of fifty years following the end of that calendar year.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 6;</li><li> 1993, c. 44, s. 58.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;6.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;6.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Anonymous and pseudonymous works</MarginalNote><Label>6.1</Label><Text>Except as provided in section 6.2, where the identity of the author of a work is unknown, copyright in the work shall subsist for whichever of the following terms ends earlier:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;6.1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a term consisting of the remainder of the calendar year of the first publication of the work and a period of fifty years following the end of that calendar year, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;6.1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a term consisting of the remainder of the calendar year of the making of the work and a period of seventy-five years following the end of that calendar year,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>but where, during that term, the author’s identity becomes commonly known, the term provided in section 6 applies.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1993, c. 44, s. 58.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;6.2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;6.2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Anonymous and pseudonymous works of joint authorship</MarginalNote><Label>6.2</Label><Text>Where the identity of all the authors of a work of joint authorship is unknown, copyright in the work shall subsist for whichever of the following terms ends earlier:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;6.2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a term consisting of the remainder of the calendar year of the first publication of the work and a period of fifty years following the end of that calendar year, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;6.2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a term consisting of the remainder of the calendar year of the making of the work and a period of seventy-five years following the end of that calendar year,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>but where, during that term, the identity of one or more of the authors becomes commonly known, copyright shall subsist for the life of whichever of those authors dies last, the remainder of the calendar year in which that author dies, and a period of fifty years following the end of that calendar year.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1993, c. 44, s. 58.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;7&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;7&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Term of copyright in posthumous works</MarginalNote><Label>7.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;7&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to subsection (2), in the case of a literary, dramatic or musical work, or an engraving, in which copyright subsists at the date of the death of the author or, in the case of a work of joint authorship, at or immediately before the date of the death of the author who dies last, but which has not been published or, in the case of a lecture or a dramatic or musical work, been performed in public or communicated to the public by telecommunication, before that date, copyright shall subsist until publication, or performance in public or communication to the public by telecommunication, whichever may first happen, for the remainder of the calendar year of the publication or of the performance in public or communication to the public by telecommunication, as the case may be, and for a period of fifty years following the end of that calendar year.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;7&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;7&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application of subsection (1)</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Subsection (1) applies only where the work in question was published or performed in public or communicated to the public by telecommunication, as the case may be, before the coming into force of this section.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;7&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;7&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Transitional provision</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Where</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;7&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a work has not, at the coming into force of this section, been published or performed in public or communicated to the public by telecommunication,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;7&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>subsection (1) would apply to that work if it had been published or performed in public or communicated to the public by telecommunication before the coming into force of this section, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;7&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the relevant death referred to in subsection (1) occurred during the period of fifty years immediately before the coming into force of this section,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>copyright shall subsist in the work for the remainder of the calendar year in which this section comes into force and for a period of fifty years following the end of that calendar year, whether or not the work is published or performed in public or communicated to the public by telecommunication after the coming into force of this section.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;7&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;7&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Transitional provision</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Where</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;7&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a work has not, at the coming into force of this section, been published or performed in public or communicated to the public by telecommunication,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;7&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>subsection (1) would apply to that work if it had been published or performed in public or communicated to the public by telecommunication before the coming into force of this section, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;7&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the relevant death referred to in subsection (1) occurred more than fifty years before the coming into force of this section,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>copyright shall subsist in the work for the remainder of the calendar year in which this section comes into force and for a period of five years following the end of that calendar year, whether or not the work is published or performed in public or communicated to the public by telecommunication after the coming into force of this section.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 7;</li><li> 1993, c. 44, s. 58;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 6.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;8&quot;"><Label>8.</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1993, c. 44, s. 59]</Repealed></Text></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;9&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;9&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Cases of joint authorship</MarginalNote><Label>9.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;9&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>In the case of a work of joint authorship, except as provided in section 6.2, copyright shall subsist during the life of the author who dies last, for the remainder of the calendar year of that author’s death, and for a period of fifty years following the end of that calendar year, and references in this Act to the period after the expiration of any specified number of years from the end of the calendar year of the death of the author shall be construed as references to the period after the expiration of the like number of years from the end of the calendar year of the death of the author who dies last.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;9&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;9&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Nationals of other countries</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Authors who are nationals of any country, other than a country that is a party to the North American Free Trade Agreement, that grants a term of protection shorter than that mentioned in subsection (1) are not entitled to claim a longer term of protection in Canada.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 9;</li><li> 1993, c. 44, s. 60.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;10&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;10&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Term of copyright in photographs</MarginalNote><Label>10.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;10&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Where the owner referred to in subsection (2) is a corporation, the term for which copyright subsists in a photograph shall be the remainder of the year of the making of the initial negative or plate from which the photograph was derived or, if there is no negative or plate, of the initial photograph, plus a period of fifty years.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;10&quot;,ss=&quot;1.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;10&quot;,ss=&quot;1.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where author majority shareholder</MarginalNote><Label>(1.1)</Label><Text>Where the owner is a corporation, the majority of the voting shares of which are owned by a natural person who would have qualified as the author of the photograph except for subsection (2), the term of copyright is the term set out in section 6.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;10&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;10&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Author of photograph</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The person who</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;10&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>was the owner of the initial negative or other plate at the time when that negative or other plate was made, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;10&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>was the owner of the initial photograph at the time when that photograph was made, where there was no negative or other plate,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>is deemed to be the author of the photograph and, where that owner is a body corporate, the body corporate is deemed for the purposes of this Act to be ordinarily resident in a treaty country if it has established a place of business therein.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 10;</li><li> 1993, c. 44, s. 60;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 69(F);</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 7.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;11&quot;"><Label>11.</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 8]</Repealed></Text></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;11.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;11.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Cinematographic works</MarginalNote><Label>11.1</Label><Text>Except for cinematographic works in which the arrangement or acting form or the combination of incidents represented give the work a dramatic character, copyright in a cinematographic work or a compilation of cinematographic works shall subsist</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;11.1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>for the remainder of the calendar year of the first publication of the cinematographic work or of the compilation, and for a period of fifty years following the end of that calendar year; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;11.1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>if the cinematographic work or compilation is not published before the expiration of fifty years following the end of the calendar year of its making, for the remainder of that calendar year and for a period of fifty years following the end of that calendar year.</Text></Paragraph><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1993, c. 44, s. 60;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 9.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;12&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;12&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where copyright belongs to Her Majesty</MarginalNote><Label>12.</Label><Text>Without prejudice to any rights or privileges of the Crown, where any work is, or has been, prepared or published by or under the direction or control of Her Majesty or any government department, the copyright in the work shall, subject to any agreement with the author, belong to Her Majesty and in that case shall continue for the remainder of the calendar year of the first publication of the work and for a period of fifty years following the end of that calendar year.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 12;</li><li> 1993, c. 44, s. 60.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_I&quot;,gb=&quot;s_13&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_I&quot;,gb=&quot;s_13&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Ownership of Copyright</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;13&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;13&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Ownership of copyright</MarginalNote><Label>13.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;13&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to this Act, the author of a work shall be the first owner of the copyright therein.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;13&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;13&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Engraving, photograph or portrait</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where, in the case of an engraving, photograph or portrait, the plate or other original was ordered by some other person and was made for valuable consideration, and the consideration was paid, in pursuance of that order, in the absence of any agreement to the contrary, the person by whom the plate or other original was ordered shall be the first owner of the copyright.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;13&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;13&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Work made in the course of employment</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Where the author of a work was in the employment of some other person under a contract of service or apprenticeship and the work was made in the course of his employment by that person, the person by whom the author was employed shall, in the absence of any agreement to the contrary, be the first owner of the copyright, but where the work is an article or other contribution to a newspaper, magazine or similar periodical, there shall, in the absence of any agreement to the contrary, be deemed to be reserved to the author a right to restrain the publication of the work, otherwise than as part of a newspaper, magazine or similar periodical.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;13&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;13&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Assignments and licences</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>The owner of the copyright in any work may assign the right, either wholly or partially, and either generally or subject to limitations relating to territory, medium or sector of the market or other limitations relating to the scope of the assignment, and either for the whole term of the copyright or for any other part thereof, and may grant any interest in the right by licence, but no assignment or grant is valid unless it is in writing signed by the owner of the right in respect of which the assignment or grant is made, or by the owner’s duly authorized agent.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;13&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;13&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Ownership in case of partial assignment</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>Where, under any partial assignment of copyright, the assignee becomes entitled to any right comprised in copyright, the assignee, with respect to the rights so assigned, and the assignor, with respect to the rights not assigned, shall be treated for the purposes of this Act as the owner of the copyright, and this Act has effect accordingly.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;13&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;13&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Assignment of right of action</MarginalNote><Label>(6)</Label><Text>For greater certainty, it is deemed always to have been the law that a right of action for infringement of copyright may be assigned in association with the assignment of the copyright or the grant of an interest in the copyright by licence.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;13&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;13&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exclusive licence</MarginalNote><Label>(7)</Label><Text>For greater certainty, it is deemed always to have been the law that a grant of an exclusive licence in a copyright constitutes the grant of an interest in the copyright by licence.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 13;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 10.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;14&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;14&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation where author is first owner of copyright</MarginalNote><Label>14.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;14&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Where the author of a work is the first owner of the copyright therein, no assignment of the copyright and no grant of any interest therein, made by him, otherwise than by will, after June 4, 1921, is operative to vest in the assignee or grantee any rights with respect to the copyright in the work beyond the expiration of twenty-five years from the death of the author, and the reversionary interest in the copyright expectant on the termination of that period shall, on the death of the author, notwithstanding any agreement to the contrary, devolve on his legal representatives as part of the estate of the author, and any agreement entered into by the author as to the disposition of such reversionary interest is void.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;14&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;14&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Restriction</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Nothing in subsection (1) shall be construed as applying to the assignment of the copyright in a collective work or a licence to publish a work or part of a work as part of a collective work.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;14&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><Label>(3)</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 11]</Repealed></Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;14&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><Label>(4)</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 3]</Repealed></Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 14;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 3;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 11.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;14.01&quot;"><Label>14.01</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 12]</Repealed></Text></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_I&quot;,gb=&quot;s_14.1&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_I&quot;,gb=&quot;s_14.1&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Moral Rights</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;14.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;14.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Moral rights</MarginalNote><Label>14.1</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;14.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The author of a work has, subject to section 28.2, the right to the integrity of the work and, in connection with an act mentioned in section 3, the right, where reasonable in the circumstances, to be associated with the work as its author by name or under a pseudonym and the right to remain anonymous.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;14.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;14.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">No assignment of moral rights</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Moral rights may not be assigned but may be waived in whole or in part.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;14.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;14.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">No waiver by assignment</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>An assignment of copyright in a work does not by that act alone constitute a waiver of any moral rights.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;14.1&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;14.1&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Effect of waiver</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Where a waiver of any moral right is made in favour of an owner or a licensee of copyright, it may be invoked by any person authorized by the owner or licensee to use the work, unless there is an indication to the contrary in the waiver.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 4.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;14.2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;14.2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Term</MarginalNote><Label>14.2</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;14.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Moral rights in respect of a work subsist for the same term as the copyright in the work.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;14.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;14.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Succession</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The moral rights in respect of a work pass, on the death of its author, to</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;14.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the person to whom those rights are specifically bequeathed;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;14.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>where there is no specific bequest of those moral rights and the author dies testate in respect of the copyright in the work, the person to whom that copyright is bequeathed; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;14.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>where there is no person described in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) or (<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>), the person entitled to any other property in respect of which the author dies intestate.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;14.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;14.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Subsequent succession</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Subsection (2) applies, with such modifications as the circumstances require, on the death of any person who holds moral rights.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 4;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 13.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="1"><Label>PART II</Label><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">COPYRIGHT IN PERFORMER’S PERFORMANCES, SOUND RECORDINGS AND COMMUNICATION SIGNALS</TitleText></Heading><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,gb=&quot;s_15&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,gb=&quot;s_15&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Performers’ Rights</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;15&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Copyright in performer’s performance</MarginalNote><Label>15.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to subsection (2), a performer has a copyright in the performer’s performance, consisting of the sole right to do the following in relation to the performer’s performance or any substantial part thereof:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>if it is not fixed,</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>to communicate it to the public by telecommunication,</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>to perform it in public, where it is communicated to the public by telecommunication otherwise than by communication signal, and</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;iii&quot;"><Label>(iii)</Label><Text>to fix it in any material form,</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>if it is fixed,</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>to reproduce any fixation that was made without the performer’s authorization,</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>where the performer authorized a fixation, to reproduce any reproduction of that fixation, if the reproduction being reproduced was made for a purpose other than that for which the performer’s authorization was given, and</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;iii&quot;"><Label>(iii)</Label><Text>where a fixation was permitted under Part III or VIII, to reproduce any reproduction of that fixation, if the reproduction being reproduced was made for a purpose other than one permitted under Part III or VIII, and</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to rent out a sound recording of it,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>and to authorize any such acts.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Conditions</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Subsection (1) applies only if the performer’s performance</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>takes place in Canada or in a Rome Convention country;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>is fixed in</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>a sound recording whose maker, at the time of the first fixation,</Text><Clause Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;,c1=&quot;A&quot;"><Label>(A)</Label><Text>if a natural person, was a Canadian citizen or permanent resident within the meaning of subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="I-2.5">Immigration and Refugee Protection Act</XRefExternal>, or a citizen or permanent resident of a Rome Convention country, or</Text></Clause><Clause Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;,c1=&quot;B&quot;"><Label>(B)</Label><Text>if a corporation, had its headquarters in Canada or in a Rome Convention country, or</Text></Clause></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>a sound recording whose first publication in such a quantity as to satisfy the reasonable demands of the public occurred in Canada or in a Rome Convention country; or</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>is transmitted at the time of the performer’s performance by a communication signal broadcast from Canada or a Rome Convention country by a broadcaster that has its headquarters in the country of broadcast.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;15&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Publication</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The first publication is deemed to have occurred in a country referred to in paragraph (2)(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>) notwithstanding that it in fact occurred previously elsewhere, if the interval between those two publications does not exceed thirty days.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 15;</li><li> 1993, c. 44, s. 61;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 14;</li><li> 2001, c. 27, s. 235.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;16&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;16&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Contractual arrangements</MarginalNote><Label>16.</Label><Text>Nothing in section 15 prevents the performer from entering into a contract governing the use of the performer’s performance for the purpose of broadcasting, fixation or retransmission.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 16;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 59;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 14.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;17&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;17&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Cinematographic works</MarginalNote><Label>17.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;17&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Where the performer authorizes the embodiment of the performer’s performance in a cinematographic work, the performer may no longer exercise, in relation to the performance where embodied in that cinematographic work, the copyright referred to in subsection 15(1).</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;17&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;17&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Right to remuneration</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where there is an agreement governing the embodiment referred to in subsection (1) and that agreement provides for a right to remuneration for the reproduction, performance in public or communication to the public by telecommunication of the cinematographic work, the performer may enforce that right against</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;17&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the other party to the agreement or, if that party assigns the agreement, the assignee, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;17&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>any other person who</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;17&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>owns the copyright in the cinematographic work governing the reproduction of the cinematographic work, its performance in public or its communication to the public by telecommunication, and</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;17&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>reproduces the cinematographic work, performs it in public or communicates it to the public by telecommunication,</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>and persons referred to in paragraphs (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) and (<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>) are jointly and severally liable to the performer in respect of the remuneration relating to that copyright.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;17&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;17&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application of subsection (2)</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Subsection (2) applies only if the performer’s performance is embodied in a prescribed cinematographic work.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;17&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;17&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exception</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>If so requested by a country that is a party to the North American Free Trade Agreement, the Minister may, by a statement published in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal>, grant the benefits conferred by this section, subject to any terms and conditions specified in the statement, to performers who are nationals of that country or another country that is a party to the Agreement or are Canadian citizens or permanent residents within the meaning of subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="I-2.5">Immigration and Refugee Protection Act</XRefExternal> and whose performer’s performances are embodied in works other than the prescribed cinematographic works referred to in subsection (3).</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 17;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 59;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 14;</li><li> 2001, c. 27, s. 236.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,gb=&quot;s_18&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,gb=&quot;s_18&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Rights of Sound Recording Makers</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;18&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;18&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Copyright in sound recordings</MarginalNote><Label>18.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;18&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to subsection (2), the maker of a sound recording has a copyright in the sound recording, consisting of the sole right to do the following in relation to the sound recording or any substantial part thereof:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;18&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to publish it for the first time,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;18&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to reproduce it in any material form, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;18&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to rent it out,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>and to authorize any such acts.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;18&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;18&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Conditions for copyright</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Subsection (1) applies only if</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;18&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the maker of the sound recording was a Canadian citizen or permanent resident within the meaning of subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="I-2.5">Immigration and Refugee Protection Act</XRefExternal>, or a citizen or permanent resident of a Berne Convention country, a Rome Convention country or a country that is a WTO Member, or, if a corporation, had its headquarters in one of the foregoing countries,</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;18&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>at the date of the first fixation, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;18&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>if that first fixation was extended over a considerable period, during any substantial part of that period; or</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;18&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the first publication of the sound recording in such a quantity as to satisfy the reasonable demands of the public occurred in any country referred to in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>).</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;18&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;18&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Publication</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The first publication is deemed to have occurred in a country referred to in paragraph (2)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) notwithstanding that it in fact occurred previously elsewhere, if the interval between those two publications does not exceed thirty days.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 18;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 17(F);</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 59;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 14;</li><li> 2001, c. 27, s. 237.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,gb=&quot;s_19&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,gb=&quot;s_19&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Provisions Applicable to both Performers and Sound Recording Makers</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;19&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;19&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Right to remuneration</MarginalNote><Label>19.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;19&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Where a sound recording has been published, the performer and maker are entitled, subject to section 20, to be paid equitable remuneration for its performance in public or its communication to the public by telecommunication, except for any retransmission.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;19&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;19&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Royalties</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>For the purpose of providing the remuneration mentioned in subsection (1), a person who performs a published sound recording in public or communicates it to the public by telecommunication is liable to pay royalties</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;19&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of a sound recording of a musical work, to the collective society authorized under Part VII to collect them; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;19&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of a sound recording of a literary work or dramatic work, to either the maker of the sound recording or the performer.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;19&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;19&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Division of royalties</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The royalties, once paid pursuant to paragraph (2)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) or (<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>), shall be divided so that</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;19&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the performer or performers receive in aggregate fifty per cent; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;19&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the maker or makers receive in aggregate fifty per cent.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 19;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 59;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 14.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;20&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;20&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Conditions</MarginalNote><Label>20.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;20&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The right to remuneration conferred by section 19 applies only if</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;20&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the maker was, at the date of the first fixation, a Canadian citizen or permanent resident within the meaning of subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="I-2.5">Immigration and Refugee Protection Act</XRefExternal>, or a citizen or permanent resident of a Rome Convention country, or, if a corporation, had its headquarters in one of the foregoing countries; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;20&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>all the fixations done for the sound recording occurred in Canada or in a Rome Convention country.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;20&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;20&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exception</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Notwithstanding subsection (1), if the Minister is of the opinion that a Rome Convention country does not grant a right to remuneration, similar in scope and duration to that provided by section 19, for the performance in public or the communication to the public of a sound recording whose maker, at the date of its first fixation, was a Canadian citizen or permanent resident within the meaning of subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="I-2.5">Immigration and Refugee Protection Act</XRefExternal> or, if a corporation, had its headquarters in Canada, the Minister may, by a statement published in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal>, limit the scope and duration of the protection for sound recordings whose first fixation is done by a maker who is a citizen or permanent resident of that country or, if a corporation, has its headquarters in that country.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;20&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;20&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exception</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>If so requested by a country that is a party to the North American Free Trade Agreement, the Minister may, by a statement published in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal>, grant the right to remuneration conferred by section 19 to performers or makers who are nationals of that country and whose sound recordings embody dramatic or literary works.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;20&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;20&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application of section 19</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Where a statement is published under subsection (3), section 19 applies</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;20&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in respect of nationals of a country mentioned in that statement, as if they were citizens of Canada or, in the case of corporations, had their headquarters in Canada; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;20&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>as if the fixations made for the purpose of their sound recordings had been made in Canada.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 20;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 59;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 14;</li><li> 2001, c. 27, s. 238.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,gb=&quot;s_21&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,gb=&quot;s_21&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Rights of Broadcasters</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;21&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;21&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Copyright in communication signals</MarginalNote><Label>21.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;21&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to subsection (2), a broadcaster has a copyright in the communication signals that it broadcasts, consisting of the sole right to do the following in relation to the communication signal or any substantial part thereof:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;21&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to fix it,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;21&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to reproduce any fixation of it that was made without the broadcaster’s consent,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;21&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to authorize another broadcaster to retransmit it to the public simultaneously with its broadcast, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;21&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of a television communication signal, to perform it in a place open to the public on payment of an entrance fee,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>and to authorize any act described in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>), (<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>) or (<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>).</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;21&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;21&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Conditions for copyright</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Subsection (1) applies only if the broadcaster</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;21&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>at the time of the broadcast, had its headquarters in Canada, in a country that is a WTO Member or in a Rome Convention country; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;21&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>broadcasts the communication signal from that country.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;21&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;21&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exception</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Notwithstanding subsection (2), if the Minister is of the opinion that a Rome Convention country or a country that is a WTO Member does not grant the right mentioned in paragraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>), the Minister may, by a statement published in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal>, declare that broadcasters that have their headquarters in that country are not entitled to that right.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 21;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 59;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 14.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,gb=&quot;s_22&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,gb=&quot;s_22&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Reciprocity</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;22&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Reciprocity</MarginalNote><Label>22.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Where the Minister is of the opinion that a country other than a Rome Convention country grants or has undertaken to grant</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to performers and to makers of sound recordings, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to broadcasters</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>that are Canadian citizens or permanent residents within the meaning of subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="I-2.5">Immigration and Refugee Protection Act</XRefExternal> or, if corporations, have their headquarters in Canada, as the case may be, whether by treaty, convention, agreement or law, benefits substantially equivalent to those conferred by this Part, the Minister may, by a statement published in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal>,</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>grant the benefits conferred by this Part</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>to performers and to makers of sound recordings, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>to broadcasters</Text></Subparagraph><ContinuedParagraph><Text>as the case may be, that are citizens, subjects or permanent residents of or, if corporations, have their headquarters in that country, and</Text></ContinuedParagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>declare that that country shall, as regards those benefits, be treated as if it were a country to which this Part extends.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Reciprocity</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where the Minister is of the opinion that a country other than a Rome Convention country neither grants nor has undertaken to grant</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to performers, and to makers of sound recordings, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to broadcasters</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>that are Canadian citizens or permanent residents within the meaning of subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="I-2.5">Immigration and Refugee Protection Act</XRefExternal> or, if corporations, have their headquarters in Canada, as the case may be, whether by treaty, convention, agreement or law, benefits substantially equivalent to those conferred by this Part, the Minister may, by a statement published in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal>,</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>grant the benefits conferred by this Part to performers, makers of sound recordings or broadcasters that are citizens, subjects or permanent residents of or, if corporations, have their headquarters in that country, as the case may be, to the extent that that country grants that those benefits to performers, makers of sound recordings or broadcasters that are Canadian citizens or permanent residents within the meaning of subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="I-2.5">Immigration and Refugee Protection Act</XRefExternal> or, if corporations, have their headquarters in Canada, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>declare that that country shall, as regards those benefits, be treated as if it were a country to which this Part extends.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application of Act</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Any provision of this Act that the Minister specifies in a statement referred to in subsection (1) or (2)</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>applies in respect of performers, makers of sound recordings or broadcasters covered by that statement, as if they were citizens of or, if corporations, had their headquarters in Canada; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>applies in respect of a country covered by that statement, as if that country were Canada.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;22&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application of Act</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Subject to any exceptions that the Minister may specify in a statement referred to in subsection (1) or (2), the other provisions of this Act also apply in the way described in subsection (3).</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 22;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 59;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 14;</li><li> 2001, c. 27, s. 239.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,gb=&quot;s_23&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,gb=&quot;s_23&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Term of Rights</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;23&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;23&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Term of rights</MarginalNote><Label>23.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;23&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to this Act, the rights conferred by sections 15, 18 and 21 terminate fifty years after the end of the calendar year in which</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;23&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of a performer’s performance,</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;23&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>its first fixation in a sound recording, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;23&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>its performance, if it is not fixed in a sound recording,</Text></Subparagraph><ContinuedParagraph><Text>occurred;</Text></ContinuedParagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;23&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of a sound recording, the first fixation occurred; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;23&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of a communication signal, it was broadcast.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;23&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;23&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Term of right to remuneration</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The rights to remuneration conferred on performers and makers by section 19 have the same terms, respectively, as those provided by paragraphs (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) and (<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>).</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;23&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;23&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application of subsections (1) and (2)</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Subsections (1) and (2) apply whether the fixation, performance or broadcast occurred before or after the coming into force of this Part.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;23&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;23&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Berne Convention countries, Rome Convention countries, WTO Members</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Where the performer’s performance, sound recording or communication signal meets the requirements set out in section 15, 18 or 21, as the case may be, a country that becomes a Berne Convention country, a Rome Convention country or a WTO Member after the date of the fixation, performance or broadcast is, as of becoming a Berne Convention country, Rome Convention country or WTO Member, as the case may be, deemed to have been such at the date of the fixation, performance or broadcast.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;23&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;23&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where term of protection expired</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>Subsection (4) does not confer any protection in Canada where the term of protection in the country referred to in that subsection had expired before that country became a Berne Convention country, Rome Convention country or WTO Member, as the case may be.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 23;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 59;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 14.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,gb=&quot;s_24&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,gb=&quot;s_24&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Ownership of Copyright</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;24&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;24&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Ownership of copyright</MarginalNote><Label>24.</Label><Text>The first owner of the copyright</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;24&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in a performer’s performance, is the performer;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;24&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in a sound recording, is the maker; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;24&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in a communication signal, is the broadcaster that broadcasts it.</Text></Paragraph><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 24;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 59;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 14.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;25&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;25&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Assignment of rights</MarginalNote><Label>25.</Label><Text>Subsections 13(4) to (7) apply, with such modifications as the circumstances require, in respect of the rights conferred by this Part on performers, makers of sound recordings and broadcasters.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 25;</li><li> 1993, c. 44, s. 62;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 59;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 14.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,gb=&quot;s_26&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_II&quot;,gb=&quot;s_26&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Performers’ Rights — WTO Countries</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;26&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Performer’s performance in WTO country</MarginalNote><Label>26.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Where a performer’s performance takes place on or after January 1, 1996 in a country that is a WTO Member, the performer has, as of the date of the performer’s performance, a copyright in the performer’s performance, consisting of the sole right to do the following in relation to the performer’s performance or any substantial part thereof:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>if it is not fixed, to communicate it to the public by telecommunication and to fix it in a sound recording, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>if it has been fixed in a sound recording without the performer’s authorization, to reproduce the fixation or any substantial part thereof,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>and to authorize any such acts.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where country joins WTO after Jan. 1, 1996</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where a performer’s performance takes place on or after January 1, 1996 in a country that becomes a WTO Member after the date of the performer’s performance, the performer has the copyright described in subsection (1) as of the date the country becomes a WTO Member.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Performer’s performances before Jan. 1, 1996</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Where a performer’s performance takes place before January 1, 1996 in a country that is a WTO Member, the performer has, as of January 1, 1996, the sole right to do and to authorize the act described in paragraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>).</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where country joins WTO after Jan. 1, 1996</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Where a performer’s performance takes place before January 1, 1996 in a country that becomes a WTO Member on or after January 1, 1996, the performer has the right described in subsection (3) as of the date the country becomes a WTO Member.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Term of performer’s rights</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>The rights conferred by this section subsist for the remainder of the calendar year in which the performer’s performance takes place and a period of fifty years following the end of that calendar year.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Assignment of rights</MarginalNote><Label>(6)</Label><Text>Subsections 13(4) to (7) apply, with such modifications as the circumstances require, in respect of a performer’s rights conferred by this section.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation</MarginalNote><Label>(7)</Label><Text>Notwithstanding an assignment of a performer’s right conferred by this section, the performer, as well as the assignee, may</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>prevent the reproduction of</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>any fixation of the performer’s performance, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>any substantial part of such a fixation,</Text></Subparagraph><ContinuedParagraph><Text>where the fixation was made without the performer’s consent or the assignee’s consent; and</Text></ContinuedParagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;26&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>prevent the importation of any fixation of the performer’s performance, or any reproduction of such a fixation, that the importer knows or ought to have known was made without the performer’s consent or the assignee’s consent.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 26;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 17(F);</li><li> 1993, c. 44, s. 63;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 59;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 14.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="1"><Label>PART III</Label><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT AND MORAL RIGHTS AND EXCEPTIONS TO INFRINGEMENT</TitleText></Heading><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_27&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_27&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Infringement of Copyright</TitleText></Heading><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_27&quot;,gc=&quot;s_27&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_27&quot;,gc=&quot;s_27&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">General</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;27&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;27&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Infringement generally</MarginalNote><Label>27.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;27&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>It is an infringement of copyright for any person to do, without the consent of the owner of the copyright, anything that by this Act only the owner of the copyright has the right to do.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;27&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;27&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Secondary infringement</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>It is an infringement of copyright for any person to</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;27&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>sell or rent out,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;27&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>distribute to such an extent as to affect prejudicially the owner of the copyright,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;27&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>by way of trade distribute, expose or offer for sale or rental, or exhibit in public,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;27&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>possess for the purpose of doing anything referred to in paragraphs (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) to (<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>), or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;27&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;e&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>import into Canada for the purpose of doing anything referred to in paragraphs (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) to (<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>),</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>a copy of a work, sound recording or fixation of a performer’s performance or of a communication signal that the person knows or should have known infringes copyright or would infringe copyright if it had been made in Canada by the person who made it.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;27&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;27&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Knowledge of importer</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>In determining whether there is an infringement under subsection (2) in the case of an activity referred to in any of paragraphs (2)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) to (<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>) in relation to a copy that was imported in the circumstances referred to in paragraph (2)(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>), it is irrelevant whether the importer knew or should have known that the importation of the copy infringed copyright.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;27&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;27&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Plates</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>It is an infringement of copyright for any person to make or possess a plate that has been specifically designed or adapted for the purpose of making infringing copies of a work or other subject-matter.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;27&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;27&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Public performance for profit</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>It is an infringement of copyright for any person, for profit, to permit a theatre or other place of entertainment to be used for the performance in public of a work or other subject-matter without the consent of the owner of the copyright unless that person was not aware, and had no reasonable ground for suspecting, that the performance would be an infringement of copyright.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 27;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 1 (3rd Supp.), s. 13, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 5;</li><li> 1993, c. 44, s. 64;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 15.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_27&quot;,gc=&quot;s_27.1&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_27&quot;,gc=&quot;s_27.1&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Parallel Importation of Books</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Importation of books</MarginalNote><Label>27.1</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to any regulations made under subsection (6), it is an infringement of copyright in a book for any person to import the book where</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>copies of the book were made with the consent of the owner of the copyright in the book in the country where the copies were made, but were imported without the consent of the owner of the copyright in the book in Canada; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the person knows or should have known that the book would infringe copyright if it was made in Canada by the importer.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Secondary infringement</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Subject to any regulations made under subsection (6), where the circumstances described in paragraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) exist, it is an infringement of copyright in an imported book for any person who knew or should have known that the book would infringe copyright if it was made in Canada by the importer to</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>sell or rent out the book;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>by way of trade, distribute, expose or offer for sale or rental, or exhibit in public, the book; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>possess the book for the purpose of any of the activities referred to in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) or (<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>).</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Subsections (1) and (2) only apply where there is an exclusive distributor of the book and the acts described in those subsections take place in the part of Canada or in respect of the particular sector of the market for which the person is the exclusive distributor.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exclusive distributor</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>An exclusive distributor is deemed, for the purposes of entitlement to any of the remedies under Part IV in relation to an infringement under this section, to derive an interest in the copyright in question by licence.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Notice</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>No exclusive distributor, copyright owner or exclusive licensee is entitled to a remedy under Part IV in relation to an infringement under this section unless, before the infringement occurred, notice has been given within the prescribed time and in the prescribed manner to the person referred to in subsection (1) or (2), as the case may be, that there is an exclusive distributor of the book.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;27.1&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</MarginalNote><Label>(6)</Label><Text>The Governor in Council may, by regulation, establish terms and conditions for the importation of certain categories of books, including remaindered books, books intended solely for re-export and books imported by special order.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 15.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;28&quot;"><Label>28.</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 15]</Repealed></Text></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;28.01&quot;"><Label>28.01</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 16]</Repealed></Text></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;28.02&quot;"><Label>28.02 and 28.03</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 17]</Repealed></Text></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_28.1&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_28.1&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Moral Rights Infringement</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;28.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;28.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Infringement generally</MarginalNote><Label>28.1</Label><Text>Any act or omission that is contrary to any of the moral rights of the author of a work is, in the absence of consent by the author, an infringement of the moral rights.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 6.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;28.2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;28.2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Nature of right of integrity</MarginalNote><Label>28.2</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;28.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The author’s right to the integrity of a work is infringed only if the work is, to the prejudice of the honour or reputation of the author,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;28.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>distorted, mutilated or otherwise modified; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;28.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>used in association with a product, service, cause or institution.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;28.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;28.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where prejudice deemed</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>In the case of a painting, sculpture or engraving, the prejudice referred to in subsection (1) shall be deemed to have occurred as a result of any distortion, mutilation or other modification of the work.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;28.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;28.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">When work not distorted, etc.</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>For the purposes of this section,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;28.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a change in the location of a work, the physical means by which a work is exposed or the physical structure containing a work, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;28.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>steps taken in good faith to restore or preserve the work</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>shall not, by that act alone, constitute a distortion, mutilation or other modification of the work.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 6.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Exceptions</TitleText></Heading><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_29&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_29&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Fair Dealing</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;29&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Research or private study</MarginalNote><Label>29.</Label><Text>Fair dealing for the purpose of research or private study does not infringe copyright.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 29;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 7;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 61;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;29.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Criticism or review</MarginalNote><Label>29.1</Label><Text>Fair dealing for the purpose of criticism or review does not infringe copyright if the following are mentioned:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the source; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>if given in the source, the name of the</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;29.1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>author, in the case of a work,</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;29.1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>performer, in the case of a performer’s performance,</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;29.1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;iii&quot;"><Label>(iii)</Label><Text>maker, in the case of a sound recording, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;29.1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;iv&quot;"><Label>(iv)</Label><Text>broadcaster, in the case of a communication signal.</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;29.2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29.2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">News reporting</MarginalNote><Label>29.2</Label><Text>Fair dealing for the purpose of news reporting does not infringe copyright if the following are mentioned:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the source; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>if given in the source, the name of the</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;29.2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>author, in the case of a work,</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;29.2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>performer, in the case of a performer’s performance,</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;29.2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;iii&quot;"><Label>(iii)</Label><Text>maker, in the case of a sound recording, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;29.2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;iv&quot;"><Label>(iv)</Label><Text>broadcaster, in the case of a communication signal.</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_29.3&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_29.3&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Acts Undertaken without Motive of Gain</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;29.3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29.3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Motive of gain</MarginalNote><Label>29.3</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;29.3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>No action referred to in section 29.4, 29.5, 30.2 or 30.21 may be carried out with motive of gain.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;29.3&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29.3&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Cost recovery</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>An educational institution, library, archive or museum, or person acting under its authority does not have a motive of gain where it or the person acting under its authority, does anything referred to in section 29.4, 29.5, 30.2 or 30.21 and recovers no more than the costs, including overhead costs, associated with doing that act.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_29.4&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_29.4&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Educational Institutions</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;29.4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29.4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Reproduction for instruction</MarginalNote><Label>29.4</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;29.4&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright for an educational institution or a person acting under its authority</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.4&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to make a manual reproduction of a work onto a dry-erase board, flip chart or other similar surface intended for displaying handwritten material, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.4&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to make a copy of a work to be used to project an image of that copy using an overhead projector or similar device</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>for the purposes of education or training on the premises of an educational institution.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;29.4&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29.4&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Reproduction for examinations, etc.</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright for an educational institution or a person acting under its authority to</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.4&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>reproduce, translate or perform in public on the premises of the educational institution, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.4&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>communicate by telecommunication to the public situated on the premises of the educational institution</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>a work or other subject-matter as required for a test or examination.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;29.4&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29.4&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where work commercially available</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Except in the case of manual reproduction, the exemption from copyright infringement provided by paragraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>) and subsection (2) does not apply if the work or other subject-matter is commercially available in a medium that is appropriate for the purpose referred to in that paragraph or subsection, as the case may be.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;29.5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29.5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Performances</MarginalNote><Label>29.5</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright for an educational institution or a person acting under its authority to do the following acts if they are done on the premises of an educational institution for educational or training purposes and not for profit, before an audience consisting primarily of students of the educational institution, instructors acting under the authority of the educational institution or any person who is directly responsible for setting a curriculum for the educational institution:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.5&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the live performance in public, primarily by students of the educational institution, of a work;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.5&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the performance in public of a sound recording or of a work or performer’s performance that is embodied in a sound recording; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.5&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the performance in public of a work or other subject-matter at the time of its communication to the public by telecommunication.</Text></Paragraph><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;29.6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29.6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">News and commentary</MarginalNote><Label>29.6</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;29.6&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to subsection (2) and section 29.9, it is not an infringement of copyright for an educational institution or a person acting under its authority to</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.6&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>make, at the time of its communication to the public by telecommunication, a single copy of a news program or a news commentary program, excluding documentaries, for the purposes of performing the copy for the students of the educational institution for educational or training purposes; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.6&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>perform the copy in public, at any time or times within one year after the making of a copy under paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>), before an audience consisting primarily of students of the educational institution on its premises for educational or training purposes.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;29.6&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29.6&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Royalties for reproduction and performance</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The educational institution must</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.6&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>on the expiration of one year after making a copy under paragraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>), pay the royalties and comply with any terms and conditions fixed under this Act for the making of the copy or destroy the copy; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.6&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>where it has paid the royalties referred to in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>), pay the royalties and comply with any terms and conditions fixed under this Act for any performance in public of the copy after the expiration of that year.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;29.7&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29.7&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Reproduction of broadcast</MarginalNote><Label>29.7</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;29.7&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to subsection (2) and section 29.9, it is not an infringement of copyright for an educational institution or a person acting under its authority to</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.7&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>make a single copy of a work or other subject-matter at the time that it is communicated to the public by telecommunication; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.7&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>keep the copy for up to thirty days to decide whether to perform the copy for educational or training purposes.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;29.7&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29.7&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Royalties for reproduction</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>An educational institution that has not destroyed the copy by the expiration of the thirty days infringes copyright in the work or other subject-matter unless it pays any royalties, and complies with any terms and conditions, fixed under this Act for the making of the copy.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;29.7&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29.7&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Royalties for performance</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright for the educational institution or a person acting under its authority to perform the copy in public for educational or training purposes on the premises of the educational institution before an audience consisting primarily of students of the educational institution if the educational institution pays the royalties and complies with any terms and conditions fixed under this Act for the performance in public.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;29.8&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29.8&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Unlawful reception</MarginalNote><Label>29.8</Label><Text>The exceptions to infringement of copyright provided for under sections 29.5 to 29.7 do not apply where the communication to the public by telecommunication was received by unlawful means.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;29.9&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29.9&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Records and marking</MarginalNote><Label>29.9</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;29.9&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Where an educational institution or person acting under its authority</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.9&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>makes a copy of a news program or a news commentary program and performs it pursuant to section 29.6, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.9&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>makes a copy of a work or other subject-matter communicated to the public by telecommunication and performs it pursuant to section 29.7,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>the educational institution shall keep a record of the information prescribed by regulation in relation to the making of the copy, the destruction of it or any performance in public of it for which royalties are payable under this Act and shall, in addition, mark the copy in the manner prescribed by regulation.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;29.9&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;29.9&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The Board may, with the approval of the Governor in Council, make regulations</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.9&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>prescribing the information in relation to the making, destruction, performance and marking of copies that must be kept under subsection (1),</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.9&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>prescribing the manner and form in which records referred to in that subsection must be kept and copies destroyed or marked, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;29.9&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>respecting the sending of information to collective societies referred to in section 71.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;30&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Literary collections</MarginalNote><Label>30.</Label><Text>The publication in a collection, mainly composed of non-copyright matter, intended for the use of educational institutions, and so described in the title and in any advertisements issued by the publisher, of short passages from published literary works in which copyright subsists and not themselves published for the use of educational institutions, does not infringe copyright in those published literary works if</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>not more than two passages from works by the same author are published by the same publisher within five years;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the source from which the passages are taken is acknowledged; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the name of the author, if given in the source, is mentioned.</Text></Paragraph><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 30;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 7;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_30.1&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_30.1&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Libraries, Archives and Museums</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Management and maintenance of collection</MarginalNote><Label>30.1</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright for a library, archive or museum or a person acting under the authority of a library, archive or museum to make, for the maintenance or management of its permanent collection or the permanent collection of another library, archive or museum, a copy of a work or other subject-matter, whether published or unpublished, in its permanent collection</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>if the original is rare or unpublished and is</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>deteriorating, damaged or lost, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>at risk of deterioration or becoming damaged or lost;</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>for the purposes of on-site consultation if the original cannot be viewed, handled or listened to because of its condition or because of the atmospheric conditions in which it must be kept;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in an alternative format if the original is currently in an obsolete format or the technology required to use the original is unavailable;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>for the purposes of internal record-keeping and cataloguing;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;e&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>for insurance purposes or police investigations; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;f&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">f</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>if necessary for restoration.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Paragraphs (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) to (<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>) do not apply where an appropriate copy is commercially available in a medium and of a quality that is appropriate for the purposes of subsection (1).</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Destruction of intermediate copies</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>If a person must make an intermediate copy in order to make a copy under subsection (1), the person must destroy the intermediate copy as soon as it is no longer needed.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.1&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>The Governor in Council may make regulations with respect to the procedure for making copies under subsection (1).</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18;</li><li> 1999, c. 31, s. 59(E).</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Research or private study</MarginalNote><Label>30.2</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright for a library, archive or museum or a person acting under its authority to do anything on behalf of any person that the person may do personally under section 29 or 29.1.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Copies of articles for research, etc.</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright for a library, archive or museum or a person acting under the authority of a library, archive or museum to make, by reprographic reproduction, for any person requesting to use the copy for research or private study, a copy of a work that is, or that is contained in, an article published in</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a scholarly, scientific or technical periodical; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a newspaper or periodical, other than a scholarly, scientific or technical periodical, if the newspaper or periodical was published more than one year before the copy is made.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Restriction</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Paragraph (2)(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>) does not apply in respect of a work of fiction or poetry or a dramatic or musical work.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Conditions</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>A library, archive or museum may make a copy under subsection (2) only on condition that</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the person for whom the copy will be made has satisfied the library, archive or museum that the person will not use the copy for a purpose other than research or private study; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the person is provided with a single copy of the work.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Patrons of other libraries, etc.</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>A library, archive or museum or a person acting under the authority of a library, archive or museum may do, on behalf of a person who is a patron of another library, archive or museum, anything under subsection (1) or (2) in relation to printed matter that it is authorized by this section to do on behalf of a person who is one of its patrons, but the copy given to the patron must not be in digital form.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;5.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;5.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Destruction of intermediate copies</MarginalNote><Label>(5.1)</Label><Text>Where an intermediate copy is made in order to copy a work referred to in subsection (5), once the copy is given to the patron, the intermediate copy must be destroyed.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</MarginalNote><Label>(6)</Label><Text>The Governor in Council may, for the purposes of this section, make regulations</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>defining “newspaper” and “periodical”;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>defining scholarly, scientific and technical periodicals;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>prescribing the information to be recorded about any action taken under subsection (1) or (5) and the manner and form in which the information is to be kept; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.2&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>prescribing the manner and form in which the conditions set out in subsection (4) are to be met.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;30.21&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.21&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Copying works deposited in archive</MarginalNote><Label>30.21</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.21&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright for an archive to make a copy, in accordance with subsection (3), of an unpublished work that is deposited in the archive.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.21&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.21&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Notice</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>When a person deposits a work in an archive, the archive must give the person notice that it may copy the work in accordance with this section.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.21&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.21&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Conditions for copying of works</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The archive may only copy the work if</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.21&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the person who deposited the work, if a copyright owner, did not, at the time the work was deposited, prohibit its copying;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.21&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>copying has not been prohibited by any other owner of copyright in the work; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.21&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the archive is satisfied that the person for whom it is made will use the copy only for purposes of research or private study and makes only one copy for that person.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.21&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.21&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>The Governor in Council may prescribe the manner and form in which the conditions in subsection (3) may be met.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.21&quot;,ss=&quot;5)&quot;"><Label>(5) to (7)</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 2004, c. 11, s. 21]</Repealed></Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18;</li><li> 1999, c. 31, s. 60(E);</li><li> 2004, c. 11, s. 21.</li></ul></HistoricalNote><a startdate="20021231">Previous Version</a></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_30.3&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_30.3&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Machines Installed in Educational Institutions, Libraries, Archives and Museums</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">No infringement by educational institution, etc.</MarginalNote><Label>30.3</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>An educational institution or a library, archive or museum does not infringe copyright where</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a copy of a work is made using a machine for the making, by reprographic reproduction, of copies of works in printed form;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the machine is installed by or with the approval of the educational institution, library, archive or museum on its premises for use by students, instructors or staff at the educational institution or by persons using the library, archive or museum; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>there is affixed in the prescribed manner and location a notice warning of infringement of copyright.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Subsection (1) only applies if, in respect of a reprographic reproduction,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the educational institution, library, archive or museum has entered into an agreement with a collective society that is authorized by copyright owners to grant licences on their behalf;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the Board has, in accordance with section 70.2, fixed the royalties and related terms and conditions in respect of a licence;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a tariff has been approved in accordance with section 70.15; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a collective society has filed a proposed tariff in accordance with section 70.13.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Order</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Where a collective society offers to negotiate or has begun to negotiate an agreement referred to in paragraph (2)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>), the Board may, at the request of either party, order that the educational institution, library, archive or museum be treated as an institution to which subsection (1) applies, during the period specified in the order.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Agreement with copyright owner</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Where an educational institution, library, archive or museum has entered into an agreement with a copyright owner other than a collective society respecting reprographic reproduction, subsection (1) applies only in respect of the works of the copyright owner that are covered by the agreement.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.3&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>The Governor in Council may, for the purposes of paragraph 1(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>), prescribe by regulation the manner of affixing and location of notices and the dimensions, form and contents of notices.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_30.4&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_30.4&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Libraries, Archives and Museums in Educational Institutions</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;30.4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application to libraries, etc. within educational institutions</MarginalNote><Label>30.4</Label><Text>For greater certainty, the exceptions to infringement of copyright provided for under sections 29.4 to 30.3 and 45 also apply in respect of a library, archive or museum that forms part of an educational institution.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_30.5&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_30.5&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Library and Archives of Canada</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;30.5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Permitted acts</MarginalNote><Label>30.5</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright for the Librarian and Archivist of Canada under the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="L-7.7">Library and Archives of Canada Act</XRefExternal>, to</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.5&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>make a copy of a work or other subject-matter in taking a representative sample for the purpose of preservation under subsection 8(2) of that Act;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.5&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>effect the fixation of a copy of a publication, as defined in section 2 of that Act, that is provided by telecommunication in accordance with subsection 10(1) of that Act;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.5&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>make a copy of a recording, as defined in subsection 11(2) of that Act, for the purposes of section 11 of that Act; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.5&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>at the time that a broadcasting undertaking, as defined in subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="B-9.01">Broadcasting Act</XRefExternal>, communicates a work or other subject-matter to the public by telecommunication, make a copy of the work or other subject-matter that is included in that communication.</Text></Paragraph><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18;</li><li> 2004, c. 11, s. 25.</li></ul></HistoricalNote><a startdate="20021231">Previous Version</a></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_30.6&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_30.6&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Computer Programs</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;30.6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Permitted acts</MarginalNote><Label>30.6</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright in a computer program for a person who owns a copy of the computer program that is authorized by the owner of the copyright to</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.6&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>make a single reproduction of the copy by adapting, modifying or converting the computer program or translating it into another computer language if the person proves that the reproduced copy is</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;30.6&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>essential for the compatibility of the computer program with a particular computer,</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;30.6&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>solely for the person’s own use, and</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;30.6&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;iii&quot;"><Label>(iii)</Label><Text>destroyed immediately after the person ceases to be the owner of the copy; or</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.6&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>make a single reproduction for backup purposes of the copy or of a reproduced copy referred to in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) if the person proves that the reproduction for backup purposes is destroyed immediately when the person ceases to be the owner of the copy of the computer program.</Text></Paragraph><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_30.7&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_30.7&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Incidental Inclusion</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;30.7&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.7&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Incidental use</MarginalNote><Label>30.7</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright to incidentally and not deliberately</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.7&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>include a work or other subject-matter in another work or other subject-matter; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.7&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>do any act in relation to a work or other subject-matter that is incidentally and not deliberately included in another work or other subject-matter.</Text></Paragraph><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_30.8&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_30.8&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Ephemeral Recordings</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Ephemeral recordings</MarginalNote><Label>30.8</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright for a programming undertaking to fix or reproduce in accordance with this section a performer’s performance or work, other than a cinematographic work, that is performed live or a sound recording that is performed at the same time as the performer’s performance or work, if the undertaking</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>is authorized to communicate the performer’s performance, work or sound recording to the public by telecommunication;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>makes the fixation or the reproduction itself, for its own broadcasts;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>does not synchronize the fixation or reproduction with all or part of another recording, performer’s performance or work; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>does not cause the fixation or reproduction to be used in an advertisement intended to sell or promote, as the case may be, a product, service, cause or institution.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Record keeping</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The programming undertaking must record the dates of the making and destruction of all fixations and reproductions and any other prescribed information about the fixation or reproduction, and keep the record current.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Right of access by copyright owners</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The programming undertaking must make the record referred to in subsection (2) available to owners of copyright in the works, sound recordings or performer’s performances, or their representatives, within twenty-four hours after receiving a request.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Destruction</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>The programming undertaking must destroy the fixation or reproduction within thirty days after making it, unless</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the copyright owner authorizes its retention; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>it is deposited in an archive, in accordance with subsection (6).</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Royalties</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>Where the copyright owner authorizes the fixation or reproduction to be retained after the thirty days, the programming undertaking must pay any applicable royalty.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Archive</MarginalNote><Label>(6)</Label><Text>Where the programming undertaking considers a fixation or reproduction to be of an exceptional documentary character, the undertaking may, with the consent of an official archive, deposit it in the official archive and must notify the copyright owner, within thirty days, of the deposit of the fixation or reproduction.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Definition of <DefinedTermEn>official archive</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><Label>(7)</Label><Text>In subsection (6), <DefinedTermEn>official archive</DefinedTermEn> means the Library and Archives of Canada or any archive established under the law of a province for the preservation of the official archives of the province.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;8&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;8&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application</MarginalNote><Label>(8)</Label><Text>This section does not apply where a licence is available from a collective society to make the fixation or reproduction of the performer’s performance, work or sound recording.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;9&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;9&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Telecommunications by networks</MarginalNote><Label>(9)</Label><Text>A broadcasting undertaking, as defined in the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="B-9.01">Broadcasting Act</XRefExternal>, may make a single reproduction of a fixation or reproduction made by a programming undertaking and communicate it to the public by telecommunication, within the period referred to in subsection (4), if the broadcasting undertaking meets the conditions set out in subsection (1) and is part of a prescribed network that includes the programming undertaking.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;10&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;10&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitations</MarginalNote><Label>(10)</Label><Text>The reproduction and communication to the public by telecommunication must be made</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;10&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in accordance with subsections (2) to (6); and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;10&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>within thirty days after the day on which the programming undertaking made the fixation or reproduction.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;11&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;11&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Definition of <DefinedTermEn>programming undertaking</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><Label>(11)</Label><Text>In this section, <DefinedTermEn>programming undertaking</DefinedTermEn> means</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;11&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a programming undertaking as defined in subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="B-9.01">Broadcasting Act</XRefExternal>;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;11&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a programming undertaking described in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) that originates programs within a network, as defined in subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="B-9.01">Broadcasting Act</XRefExternal>; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.8&quot;,ss=&quot;11&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a distribution undertaking as defined in subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="B-9.01">Broadcasting Act</XRefExternal>, in respect of the programs that it originates.</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>The undertaking must hold a broadcasting licence issued by the Canadian Radio-television and Telecommunications Commission under the Broadcasting Act.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18;</li><li> 2004, c. 11, s. 26.</li></ul></HistoricalNote><a startdate="20021231">Previous Version</a></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Pre-recorded recordings</MarginalNote><Label>30.9</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright for a broadcasting undertaking to reproduce in accordance with this section a sound recording, or a performer’s performance or work that is embodied in a sound recording, solely for the purpose of transferring it to a format appropriate for broadcasting, if the undertaking</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>owns the copy of the sound recording, performer’s performance or work and that copy is authorized by the owner of the copyright;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>is authorized to communicate the sound recording, performer’s performance or work to the public by telecommunication;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>makes the reproduction itself, for its own broadcasts;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>does not synchronize the reproduction with all or part of another recording, performer’s performance or work; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;e&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>does not cause the reproduction to be used in an advertisement intended to sell or promote, as the case may be, a product, service, cause or institution.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Record keeping</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The broadcasting undertaking must record the dates of the making and destruction of all reproductions and any other prescribed information about the reproduction, and keep the record current.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Right of access by copyright owners</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The broadcasting undertaking must make the record referred to in subsection (2) available to owners of copyright in the sound recordings, performer’s performances or works, or their representatives, within twenty-four hours after receiving a request.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Destruction</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>The broadcasting undertaking must destroy the reproduction when it no longer possesses the sound recording or performer’s performance or work embodied in the sound recording, or at the latest within thirty days after making the reproduction, unless the copyright owner authorizes the reproduction to be retained.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Royalty</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>If the copyright owner authorizes the reproduction to be retained, the broadcasting undertaking must pay any applicable royalty.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application</MarginalNote><Label>(6)</Label><Text>This section does not apply if a licence is available from a collective society to reproduce the sound recording, performer’s performance or work.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;30.9&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Definition of <DefinedTermEn>broadcasting undertaking</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><Label>(7)</Label><Text>In this section, <DefinedTermEn>broadcasting undertaking</DefinedTermEn> means a broadcasting undertaking as defined in subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="B-9.01">Broadcasting Act</XRefExternal> that holds a broadcasting licence issued by the Canadian Radio-television and Telecommunications Commission under that Act.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 18.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_31&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_31&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Retransmission</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;31&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Interpretation</MarginalNote><Label>31.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>In this section,</Text><Definition Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{new media retransmitter}{retransmetteur de nouveaux médias}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{new media retransmitter}{retransmetteur de nouveaux médias}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>new media retransmitter</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{new media retransmitter}{retransmetteur de nouveaux médias}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>retransmetteur de nouveaux médias</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>new media retransmitter</DefinedTermEn> means a person whose retransmission is lawful under the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="B-9.01">Broadcasting Act</XRefExternal> only by reason of the <XRefExternal reference-type="regulation">Exemption Order for New Media Broadcasting Undertakings</XRefExternal> issued by the Canadian Radio-television and Telecommunications Commission as Appendix A to Public Notice CRTC 1999-197, as amended from time to time;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{retransmitter}{retransmetteur}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{retransmitter}{retransmetteur}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>retransmitter</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{retransmitter}{retransmetteur}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>retransmetteur</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>retransmitter</DefinedTermEn> means a person who performs a function comparable to that of a cable retransmission system, but does not include a new media retransmitter;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{signal}{signal}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{signal}{signal}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>signal</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{signal}{signal}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>signal</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>signal</DefinedTermEn> means a signal that carries a literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work and is transmitted for free reception by the public by a terrestrial radio or terrestrial television station.</Text></Definition></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Retransmission of local and distant signals</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright for a retransmitter to communicate to the public by telecommunication any literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work if</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the communication is a retransmission of a local or distant signal;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the retransmission is lawful under the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="B-9.01">Broadcasting Act</XRefExternal>;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the signal is retransmitted simultaneously and without alteration, except as otherwise required or permitted by or under the laws of Canada;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of the retransmission of a distant signal, the retransmitter has paid any royalties, and complied with any terms and conditions, fixed under this Act; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;e&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the retransmitter complies with the applicable conditions, if any, referred to in paragraph (3)(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>).</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The Governor in Council may make regulations</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>defining “local signal” and “distant signal” for the purposes of subsection (2); and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;31&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>prescribing conditions for the purposes of paragraph (2)(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>), and specifying whether any such condition applies to all retransmitters or only to a class of retransmitter.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 31;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 7;</li><li> 1988, c. 65, s. 63;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, ss. 16, 52(F);</li><li> 2002, c. 26, s. 2.</li></ul></HistoricalNote><a startdate="20021231">Previous Version</a></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_32&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_32&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Persons with Perceptual Disabilities</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;32&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;32&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Reproduction in alternate format</MarginalNote><Label>32.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;32&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright for a person, at the request of a person with a perceptual disability, or for a non-profit organization acting for his or her benefit, to</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>make a copy or sound recording of a literary, musical, artistic or dramatic work, other than a cinematographic work, in a format specially designed for persons with a perceptual disability;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>translate, adapt or reproduce in sign language a literary or dramatic work, other than a cinematographic work, in a format specially designed for persons with a perceptual disability; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>perform in public a literary or dramatic work, other than a cinematographic work, in sign language, either live or in a format specially designed for persons with a perceptual disability.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;32&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;32&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Subsection (1) does not authorize the making of a large print book.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;32&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;32&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Subsection (1) does not apply where the work or sound recording is commercially available in a format specially designed to meet the needs of any person referred to in that subsection, within the meaning of paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) of the definition “commercially available”.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 32;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 7;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 19.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_32.1&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_32.1&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Statutory Obligations</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;32.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;32.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">No infringement</MarginalNote><Label>32.1</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;32.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright for any person</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to disclose, pursuant to the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="A-1">Access to Information Act</XRefExternal>, a record within the meaning of that Act, or to disclose, pursuant to any like Act of the legislature of a province, like material;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to disclose, pursuant to the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="P-21">Privacy Act</XRefExternal>, personal information within the meaning of that Act, or to disclose, pursuant to any like Act of the legislature of a province, like information;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to make a copy of an object referred to in section 14 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="C-51">Cultural Property Export and Import Act</XRefExternal>, for deposit in an institution pursuant to a direction under that section; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to make a fixation or copy of a work or other subject-matter in order to comply with the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="B-9.01">Broadcasting Act</XRefExternal> or any rule, regulation or other instrument made under it.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;32.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;32.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Nothing in paragraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) or (<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>) authorizes a person to whom a record or information is disclosed to do anything that, by this Act, only the owner of the copyright in the record, personal information or like information, as the case may be, has a right to do.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;32.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;32.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Destruction of fixation or copy</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Unless the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="B-9.01">Broadcasting Act</XRefExternal> otherwise provides, a person who makes a fixation or copy under paragraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>) shall destroy it immediately on the expiration of the period for which it must be kept pursuant to that Act, rule, regulation or other instrument.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 19.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_32.2&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_29&quot;,gc=&quot;s_32.2&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Miscellaneous</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Permitted acts</MarginalNote><Label>32.2</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>for an author of an artistic work who is not the owner of the copyright in the work to use any mould, cast, sketch, plan, model or study made by the author for the purpose of the work, if the author does not thereby repeat or imitate the main design of the work;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>for any person to reproduce, in a painting, drawing, engraving, photograph or cinematographic work</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>an architectural work, provided the copy is not in the nature of an architectural drawing or plan, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>a sculpture or work of artistic craftsmanship or a cast or model of a sculpture or work of artistic craftsmanship, that is permanently situated in a public place or building;</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>for any person to make or publish, for the purposes of news reporting or news summary, a report of a lecture given in public, unless the report is prohibited by conspicuous written or printed notice affixed before and maintained during the lecture at or about the main entrance of the building in which the lecture is given, and, except while the building is being used for public worship, in a position near the lecturer;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>for any person to read or recite in public a reasonable extract from a published work; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;e&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>for any person to make or publish, for the purposes of news reporting or news summary, a report of an address of a political nature given at a public meeting.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Further permitted acts</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>It is not an infringement of copyright for a person to do any of the following acts without motive of gain at any agricultural or agricultural-industrial exhibition or fair that receives a grant from or is held by its directors under federal, provincial or municipal authority:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the live performance in public of a musical work;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the performance in public of a sound recording embodying a musical work or a performer’s performance of a musical work; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the performance in public of a communication signal carrying</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>the live performance in public of a musical work, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>a sound recording embodying a musical work or a performer’s performance of a musical work.</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Further permitted acts</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>No religious organization or institution, educational institution and no charitable or fraternal organization shall be held liable to pay any compensation for doing any of the following acts in furtherance of a religious, educational or charitable object:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the live performance in public of a musical work;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the performance in public of a sound recording embodying a musical work or a performer’s performance of a musical work; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the performance in public of a communication signal carrying</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>the live performance in public of a musical work, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;32.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>a sound recording embodying a musical work or a performer’s performance of a musical work.</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 19.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_32.3&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_32.3&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Interpretation</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;32.3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;32.3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">No right to equitable remuneration</MarginalNote><Label>32.3</Label><Text>For the purposes of sections 29 to 32.2, an act that does not infringe copyright does not give rise to a right to remuneration conferred by section 19.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 19.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_32.4&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_32.4&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Compensation for Acts Done Before Recognition of Copyright of Performers and Broadcasters</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;32.4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;32.4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Certain rights and interests protected</MarginalNote><Label>32.4</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;32.4&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Notwithstanding section 27, where a person has, before the later of January 1, 1996 and the day on which a country becomes a WTO member, incurred an expenditure or liability in connection with, or in preparation for, the doing of an act that would have infringed copyright under section 26 commencing on the later of those days, had that country been a WTO member, any right or interest of that person that</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.4&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>arises from or in connection with the doing of that act, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.4&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>is subsisting and valuable on the later of those days</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>is not prejudiced or diminished by reason only that that country has become a WTO member, except as provided by an order of the Board made under subsection 78(3).</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;32.4&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;32.4&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Compensation</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Notwithstanding subsection (1), a person’s right or interest that is protected by that subsection terminates if and when the owner of the copyright pays that person such compensation as is agreed to between the parties or, failing agreement, as is determined by the Board in accordance with section 78.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;32.4&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;32.4&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Nothing in subsections (1) and (2) affects any right of a performer available in law or equity.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 19.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;32.5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;32.5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Certain rights and interests protected</MarginalNote><Label>32.5</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;32.5&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Notwithstanding section 27, where a person has, before the later of the coming into force of Part II and the day on which a country becomes a Rome Convention country, incurred an expenditure or liability in connection with, or in preparation for, the doing of an act that would have infringed copyright under section 15 or 21 commencing on the later of those days, had Part II been in force or had that country been a Rome Convention country, any right or interest of that person that</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.5&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>arises from or in connection with the doing of that act, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;32.5&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>is subsisting and valuable on the later of those days</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>is not prejudiced or diminished by reason only that Part II has come into force or that the country has become a Rome Convention country, except as provided by an order of the Board made under subsection 78(3).</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;32.5&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;32.5&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Compensation</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Notwithstanding subsection (1), a person’s right or interest that is protected by that subsection terminates if and when the owner of the copyright pays that person such compensation as is agreed to between the parties or, failing agreement, as is determined by the Board in accordance with section 78.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;32.5&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;32.5&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Nothing in subsections (1) and (2) affects any right of a performer available in law or equity.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 19.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_33&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_III&quot;,gb=&quot;s_33&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Compensation for Acts Done Before Recognition of Copyright or Moral Rights</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;33&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;33&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Certain rights and interests protected</MarginalNote><Label>33.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;33&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Notwithstanding subsections 27(1), (2) and (4) and sections 27.1, 28.1 and 28.2, where a person has, before the later of January 1, 1996 and the day on which a country becomes a treaty country, incurred an expenditure or liability in connection with, or in preparation for, the doing of an act that would have infringed a copyright owner’s copyright or an author’s moral rights had that country been a treaty country, any right or interest of that person that</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;33&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>arises from or in connection with the doing of that act, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;33&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>is subsisting and valuable on the latest of those days</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>is not prejudiced or diminished by reason only that that country has become a treaty country, except as provided by an order of the Board made under subsection 78(3).</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;33&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;33&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Compensation</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Notwithstanding subsection (1), a person’s right or interest that is protected by that subsection terminates, as against the copyright owner or author, if and when that copyright owner or the author, as the case may be, pays that person such compensation as is agreed to between the parties or, failing agreement, as is determined by the Board in accordance with section 78.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 33;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 7;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 19.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_IV&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="1"><Label>PART IV</Label><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_IV&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">REMEDIES</TitleText></Heading><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_IV&quot;,gb=&quot;s_34&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_IV&quot;,gb=&quot;s_34&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Civil Remedies</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;34&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Copyright</MarginalNote><Label>34.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Where copyright has been infringed, the owner of the copyright is, subject to this Act, entitled to all remedies by way of injunction, damages, accounts, delivery up and otherwise that are or may be conferred by law for the infringement of a right.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Moral rights</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>In any proceedings for an infringement of a moral right of an author, the court may grant to the author or to the person who holds the moral rights by virtue of subsection 14.2(2) or (3), as the case may be, all remedies by way of injunction, damages, accounts, delivery up and otherwise that are or may be conferred by law for the infringement of a right.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Costs</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The costs of all parties in any proceedings in respect of the infringement of a right conferred by this Act shall be in the discretion of the court.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Summary proceedings</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>The following proceedings may be commenced or proceeded with by way of application or action and shall, in the case of an application, be heard and determined without delay and in a summary way:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>proceedings for infringement of copyright or moral rights;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>proceedings taken under section 44.1, 44.2 or 44.4; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>proceedings taken in respect of</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>a tariff certified by the Board under Part VII or VIII, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>agreements referred to in section 70.12.</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Practice and procedure</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>The rules of practice and procedure, in civil matters, of the court in which proceedings are commenced by way of application apply to those proceedings, but where those rules do not provide for the proceedings to be heard and determined without delay and in a summary way, the court may give such directions as it considers necessary in order to so provide.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Actions</MarginalNote><Label>(6)</Label><Text>The court in which proceedings are instituted by way of application may, where it considers it appropriate, direct that the proceeding be proceeded with as an action.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;34&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Meaning of <DefinedTermEn>application</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><Label>(7)</Label><Text>In this section, <DefinedTermEn>application</DefinedTermEn> means a proceeding that is commenced other than by way of a writ or statement of claim.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 34;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 8;</li><li> 1993, c. 15, s. 3(E), c. 44, s. 65;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 62;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 20.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;34.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;34.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Presumptions respecting copyright and ownership</MarginalNote><Label>34.1</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;34.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>In any proceedings for infringement of copyright in which the defendant puts in issue either the existence of the copyright or the title of the plaintiff thereto,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;34.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>copyright shall be presumed, unless the contrary is proved, to subsist in the work, performer’s performance, sound recording or communication signal, as the case may be; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;34.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the author, performer, maker or broadcaster, as the case may be, shall, unless the contrary is proved, be presumed to be the owner of the copyright.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;34.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;34.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where no grant registered</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where any matter referred to in subsection (1) is at issue and no assignment of the copyright, or licence granting an interest in the copyright, has been registered under this Act,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;34.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>if a name purporting to be that of</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;34.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>the author of the work,</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;34.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>the performer of the performer’s performance,</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;34.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;iii&quot;"><Label>(iii)</Label><Text>the maker of the sound recording, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;34.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;iv&quot;"><Label>(iv)</Label><Text>the broadcaster of the communication signal</Text></Subparagraph><ContinuedParagraph><Text>is printed or otherwise indicated thereon in the usual manner, the person whose name is so printed or indicated shall, unless the contrary is proved, be presumed to be the author, performer, maker or broadcaster;</Text></ContinuedParagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;34.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>if</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;34.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>no name is so printed or indicated, or if the name so printed or indicated is not the true name of the author, performer, maker or broadcaster or the name by which that person is commonly known, and</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;34.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>a name purporting to be that of the publisher or owner of the work, performer’s performance, sound recording or communication signal is printed or otherwise indicated thereon in the usual manner,</Text></Subparagraph><ContinuedParagraph><Text>the person whose name is printed or indicated as described in subparagraph (ii) shall, unless the contrary is proved, be presumed to be the owner of the copyright in question; and</Text></ContinuedParagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;34.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>if, on a cinematographic work, a name purporting to be that of the maker of the cinematographic work appears in the usual manner, the person so named shall, unless the contrary is proved, be presumed to be the maker of the cinematographic work.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 20.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;35&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;35&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Liability for infringement</MarginalNote><Label>35.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;35&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Where a person infringes copyright, the person is liable to pay such damages to the owner of the copyright as the owner has suffered due to the infringement and, in addition to those damages, such part of the profits that the infringer has made from the infringement and that were not taken into account in calculating the damages as the court considers just.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;35&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;35&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Proof of profits</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>In proving profits,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;35&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the plaintiff shall be required to prove only receipts or revenues derived from the infringement; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;35&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the defendant shall be required to prove every element of cost that the defendant claims.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 35;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 20.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;36&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;36&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Protection of separate rights</MarginalNote><Label>36.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;36&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to this section, the owner of any copyright, or any person or persons deriving any right, title or interest by assignment or grant in writing from the owner, may individually for himself or herself, as a party to the proceedings in his or her own name, protect and enforce any right that he or she holds, and, to the extent of that right, title and interest, is entitled to the remedies provided by this Act.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;36&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;36&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where copyright owner to be made party</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where proceedings referred to in subsection (1) are taken by a person other than the copyright owner, the copyright owner must be made a party to those proceedings, except</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;36&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in respect of proceedings taken under section 44.1, 44.2 or 44.4;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;36&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in respect of interlocutory proceedings unless the court is of the opinion that the interests of justice require the copyright owner to be a party; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;36&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in any other case, if the court is of the opinion that the interests of justice do not require the copyright owner to be a party.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;36&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;36&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Owner’s liability for costs</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>A copyright owner who is made a party to proceedings pursuant to subsection (2) is not liable for any costs unless the copyright owner takes part in the proceedings.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;36&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;36&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Apportionment of damages, profits</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Where a copyright owner is made a party to proceedings pursuant to subsection (2), the court, in awarding damages or profits, shall, subject to any agreement between the person who took the proceedings and the copyright owner, apportion the damages or profits referred to in subsection 35(1) between them as the court considers appropriate.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 36;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 63;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 20.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;37&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;37&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Concurrent jurisdiction of Federal Court</MarginalNote><Label>37.</Label><Text>The Federal Court has concurrent jurisdiction with provincial courts to hear and determine all proceedings, other than the prosecution of offences under section 42 and 43, for the enforcement of a provision of this Act or of the civil remedies provided by this Act.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 37;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 20.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;38&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Recovery of possession of copies, plates</MarginalNote><Label>38.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to subsection (2), the owner of the copyright in a work or other subject-matter may</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>recover possession of all infringing copies of that work or other subject-matter, and of all plates used or intended to be used for the production of infringing copies, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>take proceedings for seizure of those copies or plates before judgment if, under the law of Canada or of the province in which those proceedings are taken, a person is entitled to take such proceedings,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>as if those copies or plates were the property of the copyright owner.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Powers of court</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>On application by</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a person from whom the copyright owner has recovered possession of copies or plates referred to in subsection (1),</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a person against whom proceedings for seizure before judgment of copies or plates referred to in subsection (1) have been taken, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>any other person who has an interest in those copies or plates,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>a court may order that those copies or plates be destroyed, or may make any other order that it considers appropriate in the circumstances.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Notice to interested persons</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Before making an order under subsection (2), the court shall direct that notice be given to any person who has an interest in the copies or plates in question, unless the court is of the opinion that the interests of justice do not require such notice to be given.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Circumstances court to consider</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>In making an order under subsection (2), the court shall have regard to all the circumstances, including</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the proportion, importance and value of the infringing copy or plate, as compared to the substrate or carrier embodying it; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the extent to which the infringing copy or plate is severable from, or a distinct part of, the substrate or carrier embodying it.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;38&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>Nothing in this Act entitles the copyright owner to damages in respect of the possession or conversion of the infringing copies or plates.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 38;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 20.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Statutory damages</MarginalNote><Label>38.1</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to this section, a copyright owner may elect, at any time before final judgment is rendered, to recover, instead of damages and profits referred to in subsection 35(1), an award of statutory damages for all infringements involved in the proceedings, with respect to any one work or other subject-matter, for which any one infringer is liable individually, or for which any two or more infringers are liable jointly and severally, in a sum of not less than $500 or more than $20,000 as the court considers just.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where defendant unaware of infringement</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where a copyright owner has made an election under subsection (1) and the defendant satisfies the court that the defendant was not aware and had no reasonable grounds to believe that the defendant had infringed copyright, the court may reduce the amount of the award to less than $500, but not less than $200.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Special case</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Where</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>there is more than one work or other subject-matter in a single medium, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the awarding of even the minimum amount referred to in subsection (1) or (2) would result in a total award that, in the court’s opinion, is grossly out of proportion to the infringement,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>the court may award, with respect to each work or other subject-matter, such lower amount than $500 or $200, as the case may be, as the court considers just.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Collective societies</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Where the defendant has not paid applicable royalties, a collective society referred to in section 67 may only make an election under this section to recover, in lieu of any other remedy of a monetary nature provided by this Act, an award of statutory damages in a sum of not less than three and not more than ten times the amount of the applicable royalties, as the court considers just.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Factors to consider</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>In exercising its discretion under subsections (1) to (4), the court shall consider all relevant factors, including</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the good faith or bad faith of the defendant;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the conduct of the parties before and during the proceedings; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the need to deter other infringements of the copyright in question.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">No award</MarginalNote><Label>(6)</Label><Text>No statutory damages may be awarded against</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>an educational institution or a person acting under its authority that has committed an act referred to in section 29.6 or 29.7 and has not paid any royalties or complied with any terms and conditions fixed under this Act in relation to the commission of the act;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>an educational institution, library, archive or museum that is sued in the circumstances referred to in section 38.2; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a person who infringes copyright under paragraph 27(2)(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>) or section 27.1, where the copy in question was made with the consent of the copyright owner in the country where the copy was made.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;38.1&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exemplary or punitive damages not affected</MarginalNote><Label>(7)</Label><Text>An election under subsection (1) does not affect any right that the copyright owner may have to exemplary or punitive damages.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 20.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;38.2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;38.2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Maximum amount that may be recovered</MarginalNote><Label>38.2</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;38.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>An owner of copyright in a work who has not authorized a collective society to authorize its reprographic reproduction may recover, in proceedings against an educational institution, library, archive or museum that has reproduced the work, a maximum amount equal to the amount of royalties that would have been payable to the society in respect of the reprographic reproduction, if it were authorized, either</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>under any agreement entered into with the collective society; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>under a tariff certified by the Board pursuant to section 70.15.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;38.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;38.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Agreements with more than one collective society</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where agreements respecting reprographic reproduction have been signed with more than one collective society or where more than one tariff applies or where both agreements and tariffs apply, the maximum amount that the copyright owner may recover is the largest amount of the royalties provided for in any of those agreements or tariffs.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;38.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;38.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Subsections (1) and (2) apply only where</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the collective society is entitled to authorize, or the tariff provides for the payment of royalties in respect of, the reprographic reproduction of that category of work; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;38.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>copying of that general nature and extent is covered by the agreement or tariff.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 20.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;39&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;39&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Injunction only remedy when defendant not aware of copyright</MarginalNote><Label>39.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;39&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to subsection (2), in any proceedings for infringement of copyright, the plaintiff is not entitled to any remedy other than an injunction in respect of the infringement if the defendant proves that, at the date of the infringement, the defendant was not aware and had no reasonable ground for suspecting that copyright subsisted in the work or other subject-matter in question.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;39&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;39&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exception where copyright registered</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Subsection (1) does not apply if, at the date of the infringement, the copyright was duly registered under this Act.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 39;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 20.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;39.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;39.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Wide injunction</MarginalNote><Label>39.1</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;39.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>When granting an injunction in respect of an infringement of copyright in a work or other subject-matter, the court may further enjoin the defendant from infringing the copyright in any other work or subject-matter if</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;39.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the plaintiff is the owner of the copyright or the person to whom an interest in the copyright has been granted by licence; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;39.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the plaintiff satisfies the court that the defendant will likely infringe the copyright in those other works or subject-matter unless enjoined by the court from doing so.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;39.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;39.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application of injunction</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>An injunction granted under subsection (1) may extend to works or other subject-matter</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;39.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in respect of which the plaintiff was not, at the time the proceedings were commenced, the owner of the copyright or the person to whom an interest in the copyright has been granted by licence; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;39.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>that did not exist at the time the proceedings were commenced.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 20.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;40&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;40&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">No injunction in case of a building</MarginalNote><Label>40.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;40&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Where the construction of a building or other structure that infringes or that, if completed, would infringe the copyright in some other work has been commenced, the owner of the copyright is not entitled to obtain an injunction in respect of the construction of that building or structure or to order its demolition.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;40&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;40&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Certain remedies inapplicable</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Sections 38 and 42 do not apply in any case in respect of which subsection (1) applies.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 40;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 21.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;41&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;41&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation period for civil remedies</MarginalNote><Label>41.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;41&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to subsection (2), a court may not award a remedy in relation to an infringement unless</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;41&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case where the plaintiff knew, or could reasonably have been expected to know, of the infringement at the time it occurred, the proceedings for infringement are commenced within three years after the infringement occurred; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;41&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case where the plaintiff did not know, and could not reasonably have been expected to know, of the infringement at the time it occurred, the proceedings for infringement are commenced within three years after the time when the plaintiff first knew, or could reasonably have been expected to know, of the infringement.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;41&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;41&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Restriction</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The court shall apply the limitation period set out in paragraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) or (<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>) only in respect of a party who pleads a limitation period.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 41;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 9;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 22.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_IV&quot;,gb=&quot;s_42&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_IV&quot;,gb=&quot;s_42&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Criminal Remedies</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;42&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Offences and punishment</MarginalNote><Label>42.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Every person who knowingly</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>makes for sale or rental an infringing copy of a work or other subject-matter in which copyright subsists,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>sells or rents out, or by way of trade exposes or offers for sale or rental, an infringing copy of a work or other subject-matter in which copyright subsists,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>distributes infringing copies of a work or other subject-matter in which copyright subsists, either for the purpose of trade or to such an extent as to affect prejudicially the owner of the copyright,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>by way of trade exhibits in public an infringing copy of a work or other subject-matter in which copyright subsists, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;e&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>imports for sale or rental into Canada any infringing copy of a work or other subject-matter in which copyright subsists</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>is guilty of an offence and liable</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;f&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">f</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>on summary conviction, to a fine not exceeding twenty-five thousand dollars or to imprisonment for a term not exceeding six months or to both, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;g&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">g</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>on conviction on indictment, to a fine not exceeding one million dollars or to imprisonment for a term not exceeding five years or to both.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Possession and performance offences and punishment</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Every person who knowingly</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>makes or possesses any plate that is specifically designed or adapted for the purpose of making infringing copies of any work or other subject-matter in which copyright subsists, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>for private profit causes to be performed in public, without the consent of the owner of the copyright, any work or other subject-matter in which copyright subsists</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>is guilty of an offence and liable</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>on summary conviction, to a fine not exceeding twenty-five thousand dollars or to imprisonment for a term not exceeding six months or to both, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>on conviction on indictment, to a fine not exceeding one million dollars or to imprisonment for a term not exceeding five years or to both.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Power of court to deal with copies or plates</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The court before which any proceedings under this section are taken may, on conviction, order that all copies of the work or other subject-matter that appear to it to be infringing copies, or all plates in the possession of the offender predominantly used for making infringing copies, be destroyed or delivered up to the owner of the copyright or otherwise dealt with as the court may think fit.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation period</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Proceedings by summary conviction in respect of an offence under this section may be instituted at any time within, but not later than, two years after the time when the offence was committed.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;42&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Parallel importation of books</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>No person may be prosecuted under this section for importing a book or dealing with an imported book in the manner described in section 27.1.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 42;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 10;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 24.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;43&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;43&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Infringement in case of dramatic, operatic or musical work</MarginalNote><Label>43.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;43&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Any person who, without the written consent of the owner of the copyright or of the legal representative of the owner, knowingly performs or causes to be performed in public and for private profit the whole or any part, constituting an infringement, of any dramatic or operatic work or musical composition in which copyright subsists in Canada is guilty of an offence and liable on summary conviction to a fine not exceeding two hundred and fifty dollars and, in the case of a second or subsequent offence, either to that fine or to imprisonment for a term not exceeding two months or to both.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;43&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;43&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Change or suppression of title or author’s name</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Any person who makes or causes to be made any change in or suppression of the title, or the name of the author, of any dramatic or operatic work or musical composition in which copyright subsists in Canada, or who makes or causes to be made any change in the work or composition itself without the written consent of the author or of his legal representative, in order that the work or composition may be performed in whole or in part in public for private profit, is guilty of an offence and liable on summary conviction to a fine not exceeding five hundred dollars and, in the case of a second or subsequent offence, either to that fine or to imprisonment for a term not exceeding four months or to both.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., c. C-30, s. 26.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;43.1&quot;"><Label>43.1</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 25]</Repealed></Text></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_IV&quot;,gb=&quot;s_44&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_IV&quot;,gb=&quot;s_44&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Importation</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;44&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Importation of certain copyright works prohibited</MarginalNote><Label>44.</Label><Text>Copies made out of Canada of any work in which copyright subsists that if made in Canada would infringe copyright and as to which the owner of the copyright gives notice in writing to the Canada Border Services Agency that the owner desires that the copies not be so imported into Canada, shall not be so imported and are deemed to be included in tariff item No. 9897.00.00 in the List of Tariff Provisions set out in the schedule to the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="C-54.011">Customs Tariff</XRefExternal>, and section 136 of that Act applies accordingly.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 44;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 41 (3rd Supp.), s. 116;</li><li> 1997, c. 36, s. 205;</li><li> 1999, c. 17, s. 119;</li><li> 2005, c. 38, s. 139.</li></ul></HistoricalNote><a startdate="20021231">Previous Version</a></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Definitions</MarginalNote><Label>44.1</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>In this section and sections 44.2 and 44.3,</Text><Definition Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{court}{tribunal}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{court}{tribunal}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>court</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{court}{tribunal}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>tribunal</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>court</DefinedTermEn> means the Federal Court or the superior court of a province;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{duties}{droits}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{duties}{droits}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>duties</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{duties}{droits}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>droits</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>duties</DefinedTermEn> has the same meaning as in the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="C-52.6">Customs Act</XRefExternal>;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{Minister}{ministre}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{Minister}{ministre}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>Minister</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{Minister}{ministre}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>ministre</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>Minister</DefinedTermEn> means the Minister of Public Safety and Emergency Preparedness;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{release}{dédouanement}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{release}{dédouanement}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>release</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{release}{dédouanement}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>dédouanement</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>release</DefinedTermEn> has the same meaning as in the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="C-52.6">Customs Act</XRefExternal>.</Text></Definition></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Power of court</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>A court may make an order described in subsection (3) where the court is satisfied that</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>copies of the work are about to be imported into Canada, or have been imported into Canada but have not yet been released;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>either</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>copies of the work were made without the consent of the person who then owned the copyright in the country where the copies were made, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>the copies were made elsewhere than in a country to which this Act extends; and</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the copies would infringe copyright if they were made in Canada by the importer and the importer knows or should have known this.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Who may apply</MarginalNote><Label>(2.1)</Label><Text>A court may make an order described in subsection (3) on application by the owner or exclusive licensee of copyright in a work in Canada.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Order of court</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The order referred to in subsection (2) is an order</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>directing the Minister</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>to take reasonable measures, on the basis of information reasonably required by the Minister and provided by the applicant, to detain the work, and</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>to notify the applicant and the importer, forthwith after detaining the work, of the detention and the reasons therefor; and</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>providing for such other matters as the court considers appropriate.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">How application made</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>An application for an order made under subsection (2) may be made in an action or otherwise, and either on notice or <Language xml:lang="la">ex parte</Language>, except that it must always be made on notice to the Minister.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Court may require security</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>Before making an order under subsection (2), the court may require the applicant to furnish security, in an amount fixed by the court,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to cover duties, storage and handling charges, and any other amount that may become chargeable against the work; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to answer any damages that may by reason of the order be incurred by the owner, importer or consignee of the work.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application for directions</MarginalNote><Label>(6)</Label><Text>The Minister may apply to the court for directions in implementing an order made under subsection (2).</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Minister may allow inspection</MarginalNote><Label>(7)</Label><Text>The Minister may give the applicant or the importer an opportunity to inspect the detained work for the purpose of substantiating or refuting, as the case may be, the applicant’s claim.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;8&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;8&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where applicant fails to commence an action</MarginalNote><Label>(8)</Label><Text>Unless an order made under subsection (2) provides otherwise, the Minister shall, subject to the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="C-52.6">Customs Act</XRefExternal> and to any other Act of Parliament that prohibits, controls or regulates the importation or exportation of goods, release the copies of the work without further notice to the applicant if, two weeks after the applicant has been notified under subparagraph (3)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)(ii), the applicant has not notified the Minister that the applicant has commenced a proceeding for a final determination by the court of the issues referred to in paragraphs (2)(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>) and (<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>).</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;9&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;9&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where court finds in plaintiff’s favour</MarginalNote><Label>(9)</Label><Text>Where, in a proceeding commenced under this section, the court finds that the circumstances referred to in paragraphs (2)(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>) and (<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>) existed, the court may make any order that it considers appropriate in the circumstances, including an order that the copies of the work be destroyed, or that they be delivered up to the plaintiff as the plaintiff’s property absolutely.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;10&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.1&quot;,ss=&quot;10&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Other remedies not affected</MarginalNote><Label>(10)</Label><Text>For greater certainty, nothing in this section affects any remedy available under any other provision of this Act or any other Act of Parliament.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1993, c. 44, s. 66;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 27;</li><li> 2005, c. 38, ss. 142, 145.</li></ul></HistoricalNote><a startdate="20021231">Previous Version</a></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;44.2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Importation of books</MarginalNote><Label>44.2</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;44.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>A court may, subject to this section, make an order described in subsection 44.1(3) in relation to a book where the court is satisfied that</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;44.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>copies of the book are about to be imported into Canada, or have been imported into Canada but have not yet been released;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;44.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>copies of the book were made with the consent of the owner of the copyright in the book in the country where the copies were made, but were imported without the consent of the owner in Canada of the copyright in the book; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;44.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the copies would infringe copyright if they were made in Canada by the importer and the importer knows or should have known this.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;44.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Who may apply</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>A court may make an order described in subsection 44.1(3) in relation to a book on application by</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;44.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the owner of the copyright in the book in Canada;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;44.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the exclusive licensee of the copyright in the book in Canada; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;44.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the exclusive distributor of the book.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;44.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Subsections (1) and (2) only apply where there is an exclusive distributor of the book and the acts described in those subsections take place in the part of Canada or in respect of the particular sector of the market for which the person is the exclusive distributor.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;44.2&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.2&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application of certain provisions</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Subsections 44.1(3) to (10) apply, with such modifications as the circumstances require, in respect of an order made under subsection (1).</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1994, c. 47, s. 66;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 28.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;44.3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation</MarginalNote><Label>44.3</Label><Text>No exclusive licensee of the copyright in a book in Canada, and no exclusive distributor of a book, may obtain an order under section 44.2 against another exclusive licensee of the copyright in that book in Canada or against another exclusive distributor of that book.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 28.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;44.4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;44.4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Importation of other subject-matter</MarginalNote><Label>44.4</Label><Text>Section 44.1 applies, with such modifications as the circumstances require, in respect of a sound recording, performer’s performance or communication signal, where a fixation or a reproduction of a fixation of it</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;44.4&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>is about to be imported into Canada, or has been imported into Canada but has not yet been released;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;44.4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>either</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;44.4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>was made without the consent of the person who then owned the copyright in the sound recording, performer’s performance or communication signal, as the case may be, in the country where the fixation or reproduction was made, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;44.4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>was made elsewhere than in a country to which Part II extends; and</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;44.4&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>would infringe the right of the owner of copyright in the sound recording, performer’s performance or communication signal if it was made in Canada by the importer and the importer knows or should have known this.</Text></Paragraph><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 28.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;45&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;45&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exceptions</MarginalNote><Label>45.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;45&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Notwithstanding anything in this Act, it is lawful for a person</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;45&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to import for their own use not more than two copies of a work or other subject-matter made with the consent of the owner of the copyright in the country where it was made;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;45&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to import for use by a department of the Government of Canada or a province copies of a work or other subject-matter made with the consent of the owner of the copyright in the country where it was made;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;45&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>at any time before copies of a work or other subject-matter are made in Canada, to import any copies, except copies of a book, made with the consent of the owner of the copyright in the country where the copies were made, that are required for the use of a library, archive, museum or educational institution;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;45&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to import, for the use of a library, archive, museum or educational institution, not more than one copy of a book that is made with the consent of the owner of the copyright in the country where the book was made; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;45&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;e&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to import copies, made with the consent of the owner of the copyright in the country where they were made, of any used books, except textbooks of a scientific, technical or scholarly nature for use within an educational institution in a course of instruction.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;45&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;45&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Satisfactory evidence</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>An officer of customs may, in the officer’s discretion, require a person seeking to import a copy of a work or other subject-matter under this section to produce satisfactory evidence of the facts necessary to establish the person’s right to import the copy.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 45;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 41 (3rd Supp.), s. 117;</li><li> 1993, c. 44, s. 67;</li><li> 1994, c. 47, s. 67;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 28.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_V&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="1"><Label>PART V</Label><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_V&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">ADMINISTRATION</TitleText></Heading><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_V&quot;,gb=&quot;s_46&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_V&quot;,gb=&quot;s_46&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Copyright Office</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;46&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;46&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Copyright Office</MarginalNote><Label>46.</Label><Text>The Copyright Office shall be attached to the Patent Office.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., c. C-30, s. 29.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;47&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;47&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Powers of Commissioner and Registrar</MarginalNote><Label>47.</Label><Text>The Commissioner of Patents shall exercise the powers conferred and perform the duties imposed on him by this Act under the direction of the Minister, and, in the absence of the Commissioner of Patents or if the Commissioner is unable to act, the Registrar of Copyrights or other officer temporarily appointed by the Minister may, as Acting Commissioner, exercise those powers and perform those duties under the direction of the Minister.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., c. C-30, s. 30.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;48&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;48&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Registrar</MarginalNote><Label>48.</Label><Text>There shall be a Registrar of Copyrights.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., c. C-30, s. 31.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;49&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;49&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Register of Copyrights, certificates and certified copies</MarginalNote><Label>49.</Label><Text>The Commissioner of Patents, the Registrar of Copyrights or an officer, clerk or employee of the Copyright Office may sign certificates and certified copies of the Register of Copyrights.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 49;</li><li> 1992, c. 1, s. 47;</li><li> 1993, c. 15, s. 4.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;50&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;50&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Other duties of Registrar</MarginalNote><Label>50.</Label><Text>The Registrar of Copyrights shall perform such other duties in connection with the administration of this Act as may be assigned to him by the Commissioner of Patents.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., c. C-30, s. 33.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;51&quot;"><Label>51.</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1992, c. 1, s. 48]</Repealed></Text></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;52&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;52&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Control of business and officials</MarginalNote><Label>52.</Label><Text>The Commissioner of Patents shall, subject to the Minister, oversee and direct the officers, clerks and employees of the Copyright Office, have general control of the business thereof and perform such other duties as are assigned to him by the Governor in Council.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., c. C-30, s. 35.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;53&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;53&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Register to be evidence</MarginalNote><Label>53.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;53&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The Register of Copyrights is evidence of the particulars entered in it, and a copy of an entry in the Register is evidence of the particulars of the entry if it is certified by the Commissioner of Patents, the Registrar of Copyrights or an officer, clerk or employee of the Copyright Office as a true copy.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;53&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;53&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Owner of copyright</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>A certificate of registration of copyright is evidence that the copyright subsists and that the person registered is the owner of the copyright.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;53&quot;,ss=&quot;2.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;53&quot;,ss=&quot;2.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Assignee</MarginalNote><Label>(2.1)</Label><Text>A certificate of registration of an assignment of copyright is evidence that the right recorded on the certificate has been assigned and that the assignee registered is the owner of that right.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;53&quot;,ss=&quot;2.2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;53&quot;,ss=&quot;2.2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Licensee</MarginalNote><Label>(2.2)</Label><Text>A certificate of registration of a licence granting an interest in a copyright is evidence that the interest recorded on the certificate has been granted and that the licensee registered is the holder of that interest.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;53&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;53&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Admissibility</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>A certified copy or certificate appearing to have been issued under this section is admissible in all courts without proof of the signature or official character of the person appearing to have signed it.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 53;</li><li> 1992, c. 1, s. 49;</li><li> 1993, c. 15, s. 5;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 30.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_V&quot;,gb=&quot;s_54&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_V&quot;,gb=&quot;s_54&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Registration</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;54&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;54&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Register of Copyrights</MarginalNote><Label>54.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;54&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The Minister shall cause to be kept at the Copyright Office a register to be called the Register of Copyrights in which may be entered</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;54&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the names or titles of works and of other subject-matter in which copyright subsists;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;54&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the names and addresses of authors, performers, makers of sound recordings, broadcasters, owners of copyright, assignees of copyright, and persons to whom an interest in copyright has been granted by licence; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;54&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>such other particulars as may be prescribed by regulation.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;54&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><Label>(2)</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 31]</Repealed></Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;54&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;54&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Single entry sufficient</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>In the case of an encyclopaedia, newspaper, review, magazine or other periodical work, or work published in a series of books or parts, it is not necessary to make a separate entry for each number or part, but a single entry for the whole work is sufficient.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;54&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;54&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Indices</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>There shall also be kept at the Copyright Office such indices of the Register established under this section as may be prescribed by regulation.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;54&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;54&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Inspection and extracts</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>The Register and indices established under this section shall at all reasonable times be open to inspection, and any person is entitled to make copies of or take extracts from the Register.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;54&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;54&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Former registration effective</MarginalNote><Label>(6)</Label><Text>Any registration made under the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="C-42">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, chapter 70 of the Revised Statutes of Canada, 1906, has the same force and effect as if made under this Act.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;54&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;54&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Subsisting copyright</MarginalNote><Label>(7)</Label><Text>Any work in which copyright, operative in Canada, subsisted immediately before January 1, 1924 is registrable under this Act.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 54;</li><li> 1992, c. 1, s. 50;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 31.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;55&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;55&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Copyright in works</MarginalNote><Label>55.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;55&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Application for the registration of a copyright in a work may be made by or on behalf of the author of the work, the owner of the copyright in the work, an assignee of the copyright, or a person to whom an interest in the copyright has been granted by licence.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;55&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;55&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application for registration</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>An application under subsection (1) must be filed with the Copyright Office, be accompanied by the fee prescribed by or determined under the regulations, and contain the following information:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;55&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the name and address of the owner of the copyright in the work;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;55&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a declaration that the applicant is the author of the work, the owner of the copyright in the work, an assignee of the copyright, or a person to whom an interest in the copyright has been granted by licence;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;55&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the category of the work;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;55&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the title of the work;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;55&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;e&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the name of the author and, if the author is dead, the date of the author’s death, if known;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;55&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;f&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">f</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in the case of a published work, the date and place of the first publication; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;55&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;g&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">g</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>any additional information prescribed by regulation.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 55;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 32.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;56&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;56&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Copyright in subject-matter other than works</MarginalNote><Label>56.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;56&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Application for the registration of a copyright in subject-matter other than a work may be made by or on behalf of the owner of the copyright in the subject-matter, an assignee of the copyright, or a person to whom an interest in the copyright has been granted by licence.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;56&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;56&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application for registration</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>An application under subsection (1) must be filed with the Copyright Office, be accompanied by the fee prescribed by or determined under the regulations, and contain the following information:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;56&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the name and address of the owner of the copyright in the subject-matter;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;56&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a declaration that the applicant is the owner of the copyright in the subject-matter, an assignee of the copyright, or a person to whom an interest in the copyright has been granted by licence;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;56&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>whether the subject-matter is a performer’s performance, a sound recording or a communication signal;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;56&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the title, if any, of the subject-matter;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;56&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;e&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the date of</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;56&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;e&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>in the case of a performer’s performance, its first fixation in a sound recording or, if it is not fixed in a sound recording, its first performance,</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;56&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;e&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>in the case of a sound recording, the first fixation, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;56&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;e&quot;,p2=&quot;iii&quot;"><Label>(iii)</Label><Text>in the case of a communication signal, its broadcast; and</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;56&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;f&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">f</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>any additional information prescribed by regulation.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 56;</li><li> 1993, c. 15, s. 6;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 32.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;56.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;56.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Recovery of damages</MarginalNote><Label>56.1</Label><Text>Where a person purports to have the authority to apply for the registration of a copyright under section 55 or 56 on behalf of another person, any damage caused by a fraudulent or erroneous assumption of such authority is recoverable in any court of competent jurisdiction.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 32.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;57&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;57&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Registration of assignment or licence</MarginalNote><Label>57.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;57&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The Registrar of Copyrights shall register an assignment of copyright, or a licence granting an interest in a copyright, on being furnished with</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;57&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the original instrument or a certified copy of it, or other evidence satisfactory to the Registrar of the assignment or licence; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;57&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the fee prescribed by or determined under the regulations.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;57&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><Label>(2)</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1992, c. 1, s. 51]</Repealed></Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;57&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;57&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">When assignment or licence is void</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Any assignment of copyright, or any licence granting an interest in a copyright, shall be adjudged void against any subsequent assignee or licensee for valuable consideration without actual notice, unless the prior assignment or licence is registered in the manner prescribed by this Act before the registering of the instrument under which the subsequent assignee or licensee claims.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;57&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;57&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Rectification of Register by the Court</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>The Federal Court may, on application of the Registrar of Copyrights or of any interested person, order the rectification of the Register of Copyrights by</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;57&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the making of any entry wrongly omitted to be made in the Register,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;57&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the expunging of any entry wrongly made in or remaining on the Register, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;57&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the correction of any error or defect in the Register,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>and any rectification of the Register under this subsection shall be retroactive from such date as the Court may order.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 57;</li><li> 1992, c. 1, s. 51;</li><li> 1993, c. 15, s. 7;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 33.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;58&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;58&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Execution of instruments</MarginalNote><Label>58.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;58&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Any assignment of copyright, or any licence granting an interest in a copyright, may be executed, subscribed or acknowledged at any place in a treaty country or a Rome Convention country by the assignor, licensor or mortgagor, before any notary public, commissioner or other official or the judge of any court, who is authorized by law to administer oaths or perform notarial acts in that place, and who also subscribes their signature and affixes thereto or impresses thereon their official seal or the seal of the court of which they are such judge.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;58&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;58&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Execution of instruments</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Any assignment of copyright, or any licence granting an interest in a copyright, may be executed, subscribed or acknowledged by the assignor, licensor or mortgagor, in any other foreign country before any notary public, commissioner or other official or the judge of any court of the foreign country, who is authorized to administer oaths or perform notarial acts in that foreign country and whose authority shall be proved by the certificate of a diplomatic or consular officer of Canada performing their functions in that foreign country.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;58&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;58&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Seals to be evidence</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The official seal or seal of the court or the certificate of a diplomatic or consular officer is evidence of the execution of the instrument, and the instrument with the seal or certificate affixed or attached thereto is admissible as evidence in any action or proceeding brought under this Act without further proof.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;58&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;58&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Other testimony</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>The provisions of subsections (1) and (2) shall be deemed to be permissive only, and the execution of any assignment of copyright, or any licence granting an interest in a copyright, may in any case be proved in accordance with the applicable rules of evidence.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 58;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 34.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_V&quot;,gb=&quot;s_59&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_V&quot;,gb=&quot;s_59&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Fees</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;59&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;59&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Fees regulations</MarginalNote><Label>59.</Label><Text>The Governor in Council may make regulations</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;59&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>prescribing fees, or the manner of determining fees, to be paid for anything required or authorized to be done in the administration of this Act; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;59&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>prescribing the time and manner in which the fees must be paid.</Text></Paragraph><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 59;</li><li> 1993, c. 15, s. 8.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VI&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="1"><Label>PART VI</Label><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VI&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS</TitleText></Heading><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VI&quot;,gb=&quot;s_60&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VI&quot;,gb=&quot;s_60&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Substituted Right</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;60&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;60&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Subsistence of substituted right</MarginalNote><Label>60.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;60&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Where any person is immediately before January 1, 1924 entitled to any right in any work that is set out in column I of Schedule I, or to any interest in such a right, he is, as from that date, entitled to the substituted right set out in column II of that Schedule, or to the same interest in the substituted right, and to no other right or interest, and the substituted right shall subsist for the term for which it would have subsisted if this Act had been in force at the date when the work was made, and the work had been one entitled to copyright thereunder.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;60&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;60&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where author has assigned the right</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where the author of any work in which any right that is set out in column I of Schedule I subsists on January 1, 1924 has, before that date, assigned the right or granted any interest therein for the whole term of the right, then at the date when, but for the passing of this Act, the right would have expired, the substituted right conferred by this section shall, in the absence of express agreement, pass to the author of the work, and any interest therein created before January 1, 1924 and then subsisting shall determine, but the person who immediately before the date at which the right would have expired was the owner of the right or interest is entitled at his option either</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;60&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>on giving such notice as is hereinafter mentioned, to an assignment of the right or the grant of a similar interest therein for the remainder of the term of the right for such consideration as, failing agreement, may be determined by arbitration, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;60&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>without any assignment or grant, to continue to reproduce or perform the work in like manner as theretofore subject to the payment, if demanded by the author within three years after the date at which the right would have expired, of such royalties to the author as, failing agreement, may be determined by arbitration, or, where the work is incorporated in a collective work and the owner of the right or interest is the proprietor of that collective work, without any payment,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>and the notice referred to in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) must be given not more than one year or less than six months before the date at which the right would have expired, and must be sent by registered post to the author, or, if he cannot with reasonable diligence be found, advertised in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal>.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;60&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;60&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Definition of <DefinedTermEn>author</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>For the purposes of this section, <DefinedTermEn>author</DefinedTermEn> includes the legal representatives of a deceased author.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;60&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;60&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Works made before this Act in force</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Subject to this Act, copyright shall not subsist in any work made before January 1, 1924 otherwise than under and in accordance with the provisions of this section.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 60;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 17(F);</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 52(F).</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VI&quot;,gb=&quot;s_61&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VI&quot;,gb=&quot;s_61&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Clerical Errors</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;61&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;61&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Clerical errors do not invalidate</MarginalNote><Label>61.</Label><Text>Clerical errors in any instrument of record in the Copyright Office do not invalidate the instrument, but they may be corrected under the authority of the Registrar of Copyrights.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 61;</li><li> 1992, c. 1, s. 52;</li><li> 1993, c. 15, s. 10.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VI&quot;,gb=&quot;s_62&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VI&quot;,gb=&quot;s_62&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;62&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;62&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</MarginalNote><Label>62.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;62&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The Governor in Council may make regulations</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;62&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>prescribing anything that by this Act is to be prescribed by regulation; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;62&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>generally for carrying out the purposes and provisions of this Act.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;62&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;62&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Rights saved</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The Governor in Council may make orders for altering, revoking or varying any order in council made under this Act, but any order made under this section does not affect prejudicially any rights or interests acquired or accrued at the date when the order comes into operation, and shall provide for the protection of those rights and interests.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 62;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 37.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VI&quot;,gb=&quot;s_63&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VI&quot;,gb=&quot;s_63&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Industrial Designs and Topographies</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;63&quot;"><Label>63.</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 38]</Repealed></Text></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;64&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Interpretation</MarginalNote><Label>64.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>In this section and section 64.1,</Text><Definition Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{article}{objet}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{article}{objet}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>article</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{article}{objet}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>objet</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>article</DefinedTermEn> means any thing that is made by hand, tool or machine;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{design}{dessin}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{design}{dessin}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>design</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{design}{dessin}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>dessin</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>design</DefinedTermEn> means features of shape, configuration, pattern or ornament and any combination of those features that, in a finished article, appeal to and are judged solely by the eye;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{useful article}{objet utilitaire}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{useful article}{objet utilitaire}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>useful article</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{useful article}{objet utilitaire}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>objet utilitaire</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>useful article</DefinedTermEn> means an article that has a utilitarian function and includes a model of any such article;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{utilitarian function}{fonction utilitaire}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{utilitarian function}{fonction utilitaire}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>utilitarian function</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,df=&quot;{utilitarian function}{fonction utilitaire}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>fonction utilitaire</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>utilitarian function</DefinedTermEn>, in respect of an article, means a function other than merely serving as a substrate or carrier for artistic or literary matter.</Text></Definition></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Non-infringement re certain designs</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where copyright subsists in a design applied to a useful article or in an artistic work from which the design is derived and, by or under the authority of any person who owns the copyright in Canada or who owns the copyright elsewhere,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the article is reproduced in a quantity of more than fifty, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>where the article is a plate, engraving or cast, the article is used for producing more than fifty useful articles,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>it shall not thereafter be an infringement of the copyright or the moral rights for anyone</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to reproduce the design of the article or a design not differing substantially from the design of the article by</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>making the article, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>making a drawing or other reproduction in any material form of the article, or</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to do with an article, drawing or reproduction that is made as described in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>) anything that the owner of the copyright has the sole right to do with the design or artistic work in which the copyright subsists.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exception</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Subsection (2) does not apply in respect of the copyright or the moral rights in an artistic work in so far as the work is used as or for</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a graphic or photographic representation that is applied to the face of an article;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a trade-mark or a representation thereof or a label;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>material that has a woven or knitted pattern or that is suitable for piece goods or surface coverings or for making wearing apparel;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>an architectural work that is a building or a model of a building;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;e&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a representation of a real or fictitious being, event or place that is applied to an article as a feature of shape, configuration, pattern or ornament;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;f&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">f</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>articles that are sold as a set, unless more than fifty sets are made; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;g&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">g</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>such other work or article as may be prescribed by regulation.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Idem</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Subsections (2) and (3) apply only in respect of designs created after the coming into force of this subsection, and section 64 of this Act and the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="I-9">Industrial Design Act</XRefExternal>, as they read immediately before the coming into force of this subsection, as well as the rules made under them, continue to apply in respect of designs created before that coming into force.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 64;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 11;</li><li> 1993, c. 44, s. 68;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 39.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;64.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Non-infringement re useful article features</MarginalNote><Label>64.1</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;64.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The following acts do not constitute an infringement of the copyright or moral rights in a work:</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>applying to a useful article features that are dictated solely by a utilitarian function of the article;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>by reference solely to a useful article, making a drawing or other reproduction in any material form of any features of the article that are dictated solely by a utilitarian function of the article;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>doing with a useful article having only features described in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>), or with a drawing or reproduction made as described in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>), anything that the owner of the copyright has the sole right to do with the work; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>using any method or principle of manufacture or construction.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;64.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exception</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Nothing in subsection (1) affects</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the copyright, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;64.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the moral rights, if any,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>in any sound recording, cinematograph film or other contrivance by means of which a work may be mechanically reproduced or performed.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 11;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 40.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;64.2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64.2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application of Act to topographies</MarginalNote><Label>64.2</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;64.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>This Act does not apply, and shall be deemed never to have applied, to any topography or to any design, however expressed, that is intended to generate all or part of a topography.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;64.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Computer programs</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>For greater certainty, the incorporation of a computer program into an integrated circuit product or the incorporation of a work into such a computer program may constitute an infringement of the copyright or moral rights in a work.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;64.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;64.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Definitions</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>In this section, “topography” and “integrated circuit product” have the same meaning as in the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="I-14.6">Integrated Circuit Topography Act</XRefExternal>.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1990, c. 37, s. 33.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;65&quot;"><Label>65.</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1993, c. 44, s. 69]</Repealed></Text></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="1"><Label>PART VII</Label><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">COPYRIGHT BOARD AND COLLECTIVE ADMINISTRATION OF COPYRIGHT</TitleText></Heading><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_66&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_66&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Copyright Board</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;66&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Establishment</MarginalNote><Label>66.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>There is hereby established a Board, to be known as the Copyright Board, consisting of not more than five members, including a chairman and a vice-chairman, to be appointed by the Governor in Council.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Service</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The members of the Board shall be appointed to serve either full-time or part-time.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Chairman</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The chairman must be a judge, either sitting or retired, of a superior, county or district court.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Tenure</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Each member of the Board shall hold office during good behaviour for a term not exceeding five years, but may be removed at any time by the Governor in Council for cause.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Re-appointment</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>A member of the Board is eligible to be re-appointed once only.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Prohibition</MarginalNote><Label>(6)</Label><Text>A member of the Board shall not be employed in the public service within the meaning of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="P-33.3">Public Service Labour Relations Act</XRefExternal> during the member’s term of office.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Members deemed public service employees</MarginalNote><Label>(7)</Label><Text>A full-time member of the Board, other than the chairman, shall be deemed to be employed in</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;66&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the public service for the purposes of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="P-36">Public Service Superannuation Act</XRefExternal>; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;66&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the federal public administration for the purposes of any regulations made pursuant to section 9 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="A-2">Aeronautics Act</XRefExternal>.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 66;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (1st Supp.), s. 1, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 12;</li><li> 2003, c. 22, s. 154(E), 224(E), 225(E).</li></ul></HistoricalNote><a startdate="20021231">Previous Version</a></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;66.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Duties of chairman</MarginalNote><Label>66.1</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The chairman shall direct the work of the Board and apportion its work among the members of the Board.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Absence or incapacity of chairman</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>If the chairman is absent or incapacitated or if the office of chairman is vacant, the vice-chairman has all the powers and functions of the chairman during the absence, incapacity or vacancy.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Duties of vice-chairman</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The vice-chairman is the chief executive officer of the Board and has supervision over and direction of the Board and its staff.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 12.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;66.2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Remuneration and expenses</MarginalNote><Label>66.2</Label><Text>The members of the Board shall be paid such remuneration as may be fixed by the Governor in Council and are entitled to be paid reasonable travel and living expenses incurred by them in the course of their duties under this Act while absent from their ordinary place of residence.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 12.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;66.3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Conflict of interest prohibited</MarginalNote><Label>66.3</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>A member of the Board shall not, directly or indirectly, engage in any activity, have any interest in a business or accept or engage in any office or employment that is inconsistent with the member’s duties.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.3&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.3&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Termination of conflict of interest</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where a member of the Board becomes aware that he is in a conflict of interest contrary to subsection (1), the member shall, within one hundred and twenty days, terminate the conflict or resign.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 12.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;66.4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Staff</MarginalNote><Label>66.4</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.4&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Such officers and employees as are necessary for the proper conduct of the work of the Board shall be appointed in accordance with the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="P-33.01">Public Service Employment Act</XRefExternal>.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.4&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.4&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Idem</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The officers and employees referred to in subsection (1) shall be deemed to be employed in the public service for the purposes of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="P-36">Public Service Superannuation Act</XRefExternal>.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.4&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.4&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Technical assistance</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The Board may engage on a temporary basis the services of persons having technical or specialized knowledge to advise and assist in the performance of its duties and the Board may, in accordance with Treasury Board directives, fix and pay the remuneration and expenses of those persons.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 12;</li><li> 2003, c. 22, s. 225(E).</li></ul></HistoricalNote><a startdate="20021231">Previous Version</a></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;66.5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Concluding matters after membership expires</MarginalNote><Label>66.5</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.5&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>A member of the Board whose term expires may conclude the matters that the member has begun to consider.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.5&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.5&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Decisions</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Matters before the Board shall be decided by a majority of the members of the Board and the presiding member shall have a second vote in the case of a tie.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 12.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;66.51&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.51&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Interim decisions</MarginalNote><Label>66.51</Label><Text>The Board may, on application, make an interim decision.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 12.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;66.52&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.52&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Variation of decisions</MarginalNote><Label>66.52</Label><Text>A decision of the Board respecting royalties or their related terms and conditions that is made under subsection 68(3), sections 68.1 or 70.15 or or subsections 70.2(2), 70.6(1), 73(1) or 83(8) may, on application, be varied by the Board if, in its opinion, there has been a material change in circumstances since the decision was made.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 12;</li><li> 1988, c. 65, s. 64;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 42.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;66.6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</MarginalNote><Label>66.6</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.6&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The Board may, with the approval of the Governor in Council, make regulations governing</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;66.6&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the practice and procedure in respect of the Board’s hearings, including the number of members of the Board that constitutes a quorum;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;66.6&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the time and manner in which applications and notices must be made or given;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;66.6&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the establishment of forms for the making or giving of applications and notices; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;66.6&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the carrying out of the work of the Board, the management of its internal affairs and the duties of its officers and employees.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.6&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.6&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Publication of proposed regulations</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>A copy of each regulation that the Board proposes to make under subsection (1) shall be published in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal> at least sixty days before the proposed effective date thereof and a reasonable opportunity shall be given to interested persons to make representations with respect thereto.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.6&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.6&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exception</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>No proposed regulation that has been published pursuant to subsection (2) need again be published under that subsection, whether or not it has been altered as a result of representations made with respect thereto.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 12.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;66.7&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.7&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">General powers, etc.</MarginalNote><Label>66.7</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.7&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The Board has, with respect to the attendance, swearing and examination of witnesses, the production and inspection of documents, the enforcement of its decisions and other matters necessary or proper for the due exercise of its jurisdiction, all such powers, rights and privileges as are vested in a superior court of record.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.7&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.7&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Enforcement of decisions</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Any decision of the Board may, for the purposes of its enforcement, be made an order of the Federal Court or of any superior court and is enforceable in the same manner as an order thereof.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.7&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.7&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Procedure</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>To make a decision of the Board an order of a court, the usual practice and procedure of the court in such matters may be followed or a certified copy of the decision may be filed with the registrar of the court and thereupon the decision becomes an order of the court.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.7&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.7&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Effect of variation of decision</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Where a decision of the Board that has been made an order of a court is varied by a subsequent decision of the Board, the order of the court shall be deemed to have been varied accordingly and the subsequent decision may, in the same manner, be made an order of the court.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 12;</li><li> 2002, c. 8, s. 131(F).</li></ul></HistoricalNote><a startdate="20021231">Previous Version</a></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;66.71&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.71&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Distribution, publication of notices</MarginalNote><Label>66.71</Label><Text>Independently of any other provision of this Act relating to the distribution or publication of information or documents by the Board, the Board may at any time cause to be distributed or published, in any manner and on any terms and conditions that it sees fit, any notice that it sees fit to be distributed or published.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 43.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;66.8&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.8&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Studies</MarginalNote><Label>66.8</Label><Text>The Board shall conduct such studies with respect to the exercise of its powers as are requested by the Minister.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 12.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;66.9&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.9&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Report</MarginalNote><Label>66.9</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.9&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The Board shall, not later than August 31 in each year, submit to the Governor in Council through the Minister an annual report on the Board’s activities for the preceding year describing briefly the applications made to the Board, the Board’s decisions and any other matter that the Board considers relevant.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;66.9&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.9&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Tabling</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The Minister shall cause a copy of each annual report to be laid before each House of Parliament on any of the first fifteen days on which that House is sitting after the Minister receives the report.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 12.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;66.91&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;66.91&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</MarginalNote><Label>66.91</Label><Text>The Governor in Council may make regulations issuing policy directions to the Board and establishing general criteria to be applied by the Board or to which the Board must have regard</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;66.91&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in establishing fair and equitable royalties to be paid pursuant to this Act; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;66.91&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in rendering its decisions in any matter within its jurisdiction.</Text></Paragraph><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 44.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_67&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_67&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Collective Administration of Performing Rights and of Communication Rights</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;67&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;67&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Public access to repertoires</MarginalNote><Label>67.</Label><Text>Each collective society that carries on</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;67&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the business of granting licences or collecting royalties for the performance in public of musical works, dramatico-musical works, performer’s performances of such works, or sound recordings embodying such works, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;67&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the business of granting licences or collecting royalties for the communication to the public by telecommunication of musical works, dramatico-musical works, performer’s performances of such works, or sound recordings embodying such works, other than the communication of musical works or dramatico-musical works in a manner described in subsection 31(2),</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>must answer within a reasonable time all reasonable requests from the public for information about its repertoire of works, performer’s performances or sound recordings, that are in current use.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 67;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (1st Supp.), s. 1, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 12;</li><li> 1993, c. 23, s. 3;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 45.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;67.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;67.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Filing of proposed tariffs</MarginalNote><Label>67.1</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;67.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Each collective society referred to in section 67 shall, on or before the March 31 immediately before the date when its last tariff approved pursuant to subsection 68(3) expires, file with the Board a proposed tariff, in both official languages, of all royalties to be collected by the collective society.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;67.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;67.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where no previous tariff</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>A collective society referred to in subsection (1) in respect of which no tariff has been approved pursuant to subsection 68(3) shall file with the Board its proposed tariff, in both official languages, of all royalties to be collected by it, on or before the March 31 immediately before its proposed effective date.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;67.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;67.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Effective period of tariffs</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>A proposed tariff must provide that the royalties are to be effective for periods of one or more calendar years.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;67.1&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;67.1&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Prohibition of enforcement</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Where a proposed tariff is not filed with respect to the work, performer’s performance or sound recording in question, no action may be commenced, without the written consent of the Minister, for</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;67.1&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the infringement of the rights, referred to in section 3, to perform a work in public or to communicate it to the public by telecommunication; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;67.1&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the recovery of royalties referred to in section 19.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;67.1&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;67.1&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Publication of proposed tariffs</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>As soon as practicable after the receipt of a proposed tariff filed pursuant to subsection (1), the Board shall publish it in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal> and shall give notice that, within sixty days after the publication of the tariff, prospective users or their representatives may file written objections to the tariff with the Board.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 12;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 45;</li><li> 2001, c. 34, s. 35(E).</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;67.2&quot;"><Label>67.2 and 67.3</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 45]</Repealed></Text></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;68&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Board to consider proposed tariffs and objections</MarginalNote><Label>68.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The Board shall, as soon as practicable, consider a proposed tariff and any objections thereto referred to in subsection 67.1(5) or raised by the Board, and</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>send to the collective society concerned a copy of the objections so as to permit it to reply; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>send to the persons who filed the objections a copy of any reply thereto.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Criteria and factors</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>In examining a proposed tariff for the performance in public or the communication to the public by telecommunication of performer’s performances of musical works, or of sound recordings embodying such performer’s performances, the Board</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>shall ensure that</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>the tariff applies in respect of performer’s performances and sound recordings only in the situations referred to in subsections 20(1) and (2),</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>the tariff does not, because of linguistic and content requirements of Canada’s broadcasting policy set out in section 3 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="B-9.01">Broadcasting Act</XRefExternal>, place some users that are subject to that Act at a greater financial disadvantage than others, and</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;iii&quot;"><Label>(iii)</Label><Text>the payment of royalties by users pursuant to section 19 will be made in a single payment; and</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>may take into account any factor that it considers appropriate.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Certification</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The Board shall certify the tariffs as approved, with such alterations to the royalties and to the terms and conditions related thereto as the Board considers necessary, having regard to</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>any objections to the tariffs under subsection 67.1(5); and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the matters referred to in subsection (2).</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Publication of approved tariffs</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>The Board shall</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>publish the approved tariffs in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal> as soon as practicable; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;68&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>send a copy of each approved tariff, together with the reasons for the Board’s decision, to each collective society that filed a proposed tariff and to any person who filed an objection.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 68;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 13;</li><li> 1993, c. 23, s. 5;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 45.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Special and transitional royalty rates</MarginalNote><Label>68.1</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Notwithstanding the tariffs approved by the Board under subsection 68(3) for the performance in public or the communication to the public by telecommunication of performer’s performances of musical works, or of sound recordings embodying such performer’s performances,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>wireless transmission systems, except community systems and public transmission systems, shall pay royalties as follows:</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>in respect of each year, $100 on the first 1.25 million dollars of annual advertising revenues, and</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>on any portion of annual advertising revenues exceeding 1.25 million dollars,</Text><Clause Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;,c1=&quot;A&quot;"><Label>(A)</Label><Text>for the first year following the coming into force of this section, thirty-three and one third per cent of the royalties set out in the approved tariff for that year,</Text></Clause><Clause Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;,c1=&quot;B&quot;"><Label>(B)</Label><Text>for the second year following the coming into force of this section, sixty-six and two thirds per cent of the royalties set out in the approved tariff for that year, and</Text></Clause><Clause Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;,c1=&quot;C&quot;"><Label>(C)</Label><Text>for the third year following the coming into force of this section, one hundred per cent of the royalties set out in the approved tariff for that year;</Text></Clause></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>community systems shall pay royalties of $100 in respect of each year; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>public transmission systems shall pay royalties, in respect of each of the first three years following the coming into force of this section, as follows:</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>for the first year following the coming into force of this section, thirty-three and one third per cent of the royalties set out in the approved tariff for that year,</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>for the second year following the coming into force of this section, sixty-six and two thirds per cent of the royalties set out in the approved tariff for that year, and</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;,p2=&quot;iii&quot;"><Label>(iii)</Label><Text>for the third year following the coming into force of this section, one hundred per cent of the royalties set out in the approved tariff for that year.</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Effect of paying royalties</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The payment of the royalties set out in subsection (1) fully discharges all liabilities of the system in question in respect of the approved tariffs.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Definition of <DefinedTermEn>advertising revenues</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The Board may, by regulation, define <DefinedTermEn>advertising revenues</DefinedTermEn> for the purposes of subsection (1).</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Preferential royalty rates</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>The Board shall, in certifying a tariff as approved under subsection 68(3), ensure that there is a preferential royalty rate for small cable transmission systems.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;68.1&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>The Governor in Council may make regulations defining “small cable transmission system”, “community system”, “public transmission system” and “wireless transmission system” for the purposes of this section.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 45.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;68.2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;68.2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Effect of fixing royalties</MarginalNote><Label>68.2</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;68.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Without prejudice to any other remedies available to it, a collective society may, for the period specified in its approved tariff, collect the royalties specified in the tariff and, in default of their payment, recover them in a court of competent jurisdiction.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;68.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;68.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Proceedings barred if royalties tendered or paid</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>No proceedings may be brought for</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;68.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the infringement of the right to perform in public or the right to communicate to the public by telecommunication, referred to in section 3, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;68.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the recovery of royalties referred to in section 19</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>against a person who has paid or offered to pay the royalties specified in an approved tariff.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;68.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;68.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Continuation of rights</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Where a collective society files a proposed tariff in accordance with subsection 67.1(1),</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;68.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>any person entitled to perform in public or communicate to the public by telecommunication those works, performer’s performances or sound recordings pursuant to the previous tariff may do so, even though the royalties set out therein have ceased to be in effect, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;68.2&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the collective society may collect the royalties in accordance with the previous tariff,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>until the proposed tariff is approved.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 45.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_69&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_69&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Public Performances in Places Other Than Theatres</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;69&quot;"><Label>69.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;69&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 14]</Repealed></Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;69&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;69&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Radio performances in places other than theatres</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>In respect of public performances by means of any radio receiving set in any place other than a theatre that is ordinarily and regularly used for entertainments to which an admission charge is made, no royalties shall be collectable from the owner or user of the radio receiving set, but the Board shall, in so far as possible, provide for the collection in advance from radio broadcasting stations of royalties appropriate to the conditions produced by the provisions of this subsection and shall fix the amount of the same.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;69&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;69&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Expenses to be taken into account</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>In fixing royalties pursuant to subsection (2), the Board shall take into account all expenses of collection and other outlays, if any, saved or savable by, for or on behalf of the owner of the copyright or performing right concerned or his agents, in consequence of subsection (2).</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;69&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><Label>(4)</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 14]</Repealed></Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 69;</li><li> R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 14;</li><li> 1993, c. 44, s. 73;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 52(F).</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;70&quot;"><Label>70.</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 15]</Repealed></Text></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_70.1&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_70.1&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Collective Administration in Relation to Rights under Sections 3, 15, 18 and 21</TitleText></Heading><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_70.1&quot;,gc=&quot;s_70.1&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_70.1&quot;,gc=&quot;s_70.1&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Collective Societies</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;70.1&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.1&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Collective societies</MarginalNote><Label>70.1</Label><Text>Sections 70.11 to 70.6 apply in respect of a collective society that operates</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;70.1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a licensing scheme, applicable in relation to a repertoire of works of more than one author, pursuant to which the society sets out the classes of uses for which and the royalties and terms and conditions on which it agrees to authorize the doing of an act mentioned in section 3 in respect of those works;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;70.1&quot;,p1=&quot;a.1&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a.1</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a licensing scheme, applicable in relation to a repertoire of performer’s performances of more than one performer, pursuant to which the society sets out the classes of uses for which and the royalties and terms and conditions on which it agrees to authorize the doing of an act mentioned in section 15 in respect of those performer’s performances;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;70.1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a licensing scheme, applicable in relation to a repertoire of sound recordings of more than one maker, pursuant to which the society sets out the classes of uses for which and the royalties and terms and conditions on which it agrees to authorize the doing of an act mentioned in section 18 in respect of those sound recordings; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;70.1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a licensing scheme, applicable in relation to a repertoire of communication signals of more than one broadcaster, pursuant to which the society sets out the classes of uses for which and the royalties and terms and conditions on which it agrees to authorize the doing of an act mentioned in section 21 in respect of those communication signals.</Text></Paragraph><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 16;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 46.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;70.11&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.11&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Public information</MarginalNote><Label>70.11</Label><Text>A collective society referred to in section 70.1 must answer within a reasonable time all reasonable requests from the public for information about its repertoire of works, performer’s performances, sound recordings or communication signals.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 46.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;70.12&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.12&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Tariff or agreement</MarginalNote><Label>70.12</Label><Text>A collective society may, for the purpose of setting out by licence the royalties and terms and conditions relating to classes of uses,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;70.12&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>file a proposed tariff with the Board; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;70.12&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>enter into agreements with users.</Text></Paragraph><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 46.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_70.1&quot;,gc=&quot;s_70.13&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_70.1&quot;,gc=&quot;s_70.13&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Tariffs</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;70.13&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.13&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Filing of proposed tariffs</MarginalNote><Label>70.13</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;70.13&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Each collective society referred to in section 70.1 may, on or before the March 31 immediately before the date when its last tariff approved pursuant to subsection 70.15(1) expires, file with the Board a proposed tariff, in both official languages, of royalties to be collected by the collective society for issuing licences.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;70.13&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.13&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where no previous tariff</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>A collective society referred to in subsection (1) in respect of which no tariff has been approved pursuant to subsection 70.15(1) shall file with the Board its proposed tariff, in both official languages, of all royalties to be collected by it for issuing licences, on or before the March 31 immediately before its proposed effective date.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 46.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;70.14&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.14&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application of certain provisions</MarginalNote><Label>70.14</Label><Text>Where a proposed tariff is filed under section 70.13, subsections 67.1(3) and (5) and subsection 68(1) apply, with such modifications as the circumstances require.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 46.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;70.15&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.15&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Certification</MarginalNote><Label>70.15</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;70.15&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The Board shall certify the tariffs as approved, with such alterations to the royalties and to the terms and conditions related thereto as the Board considers necessary, having regard to any objections to the tariffs.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;70.15&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.15&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application of certain provisions</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where a tariff is approved under subsection (1), subsections 68(4) and 68.2(1) apply, with such modifications as the circumstances require.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 46.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;70.16&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.16&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Distribution, publication of notices</MarginalNote><Label>70.16</Label><Text>Independently of any other provision of this Act relating to the distribution or publication of information or documents by the Board, the Board shall notify persons affected by a proposed tariff, by</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;70.16&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>distributing or publishing a notice, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;70.16&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>directing another person or body to distribute or publish a notice,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>in such manner and on such terms and conditions as the Board sees fit.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 46.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;70.17&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.17&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Prohibition of enforcement</MarginalNote><Label>70.17</Label><Text>Subject to section 70.19, no proceedings may be brought for the infringement of a right referred to in section 3, 15, 18 or 21 against a person who has paid or offered to pay the royalties specified in an approved tariff.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 46.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;70.18&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.18&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Continuation of rights</MarginalNote><Label>70.18</Label><Text>Subject to section 70.19, where a collective society files a proposed tariff in accordance with section 70.13,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;70.18&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>any person authorized by the collective society to do an act referred to in section 3, 15, 18 or 21, as the case may be, pursuant to the previous tariff may do so, even though the royalties set out therein have ceased to be in effect, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;70.18&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the collective society may collect the royalties in accordance with the previous tariff,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>until the proposed tariff is approved.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 46.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;70.19&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.19&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where agreement exists</MarginalNote><Label>70.19</Label><Text>If there is an agreement mentioned in paragraph 70.12(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>), sections 70.17 and 70.18 do not apply in respect of the matters covered by the agreement.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 46.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;70.191&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.191&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Agreement</MarginalNote><Label>70.191</Label><Text>An approved tariff does not apply where there is an agreement between a collective society and a person authorized to do an act mentioned in section 3, 15, 18 or 21, as the case may be, if the agreement is in effect during the period covered by the approved tariff.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 46.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_70.1&quot;,gc=&quot;s_70.2&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_70.1&quot;,gc=&quot;s_70.2&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Fixing of Royalties in Individual Cases</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;70.2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application to fix amount of royalty, etc.</MarginalNote><Label>70.2</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;70.2&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Where a collective society and any person not otherwise authorized to do an act mentioned in section 3, 15, 18 or 21, as the case may be, in respect of the works, sound recordings or communication signals included in the collective society’s repertoire are unable to agree on the royalties to be paid for the right to do the act or on their related terms and conditions, either of them or a representative of either may, after giving notice to the other, apply to the Board to fix the royalties and their related terms and conditions.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;70.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.2&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Fixing royalties, etc.</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The Board may fix the royalties and their related terms and conditions in respect of a licence during such period of not less than one year as the Board may specify and, as soon as practicable after rendering its decision, the Board shall send a copy thereof, together with the reasons therefor, to the collective society and the person concerned or that person’s representative.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 16;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 46.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;70.3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Agreement</MarginalNote><Label>70.3</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;70.3&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The Board shall not proceed with an application under section 70.2 where a notice is filed with the Board that an agreement touching the matters in issue has been reached.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;70.3&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.3&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Idem</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>An agreement referred to in subsection (1) is effective during the year following the expiration of the previous agreement, if any, or of the last period specified under subsection 70.2(2).</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 16.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;70.4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Effect of Board decision</MarginalNote><Label>70.4</Label><Text>Where any royalties are fixed for a period pursuant to subsection 70.2(2), the person concerned may, during the period, subject to the related terms and conditions fixed by the Board and to the terms and conditions set out in the scheme and on paying or offering to pay the royalties, do the act with respect to which the royalties and their related terms and conditions are fixed and the collective society may, without prejudice to any other remedies available to it, collect the royalties or, in default of their payment, recover them in a court of competent jurisdiction.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 16;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 47.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_70.1&quot;,gc=&quot;s_70.5&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="3"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_70.1&quot;,gc=&quot;s_70.5&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Examination of Agreements</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;70.5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Definition of <DefinedTermEn>Commissioner</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><Label>70.5</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;70.5&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>For the purposes of this section and section 70.6, <DefinedTermEn>Commissioner</DefinedTermEn> means the Commissioner of Competition appointed under the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="C-34">Competition Act</XRefExternal>.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;70.5&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.5&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Filing agreement with the Board</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where a collective society concludes an agreement to grant a licence authorizing a person to do an act mentioned in section 3, 15, 18 or 21, as the case may be, the collective society or the person may file a copy of the agreement with the Board within fifteen days after it is concluded.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;70.5&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.5&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Idem</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Section 45 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="C-34">Competition Act</XRefExternal> does not apply in respect of any royalties or related terms and conditions arising under an agreement filed in accordance with subsection (2).</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;70.5&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.5&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Access by Commissioner</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>The Commissioner may have access to the copy of an agreement filed in accordance with subsection (2).</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;70.5&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.5&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Request for examination</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>Where the Commissioner considers that an agreement filed in accordance with subsection (2) is contrary to the public interest, the Commissioner may, after advising the parties concerned, request the Board to examine the agreement.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 16;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 48;</li><li> 1999, c. 2, ss. 45, 46.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;70.6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Examination and fixing of royalty</MarginalNote><Label>70.6</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;70.6&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The Board shall, as soon as practicable, consider a request by the Commissioner to examine an agreement and the Board may, after giving the Commissioner and the parties concerned an opportunity to present their arguments, alter the royalties and any related terms and conditions arising under the agreement, in which case section 70.4 applies with such modifications as the circumstances require.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;70.6&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;70.6&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Idem</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>As soon as practicable after rendering its decision, the Board shall send a copy thereof, together with the reasons therefor, to the parties concerned and to the Commissioner.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), s. 16;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 49(F);</li><li> 1999, c. 2, s. 46.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;70.61&quot;"><Label>70.61 to 70.8</Label><Text><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 50]</Repealed></Text></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_71&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_71&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Royalties in Particular Cases</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;71&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;71&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Filing of proposed tariffs</MarginalNote><Label>71.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;71&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Each collective society that carries on the business of collecting royalties referred to in subsection 29.6(2), 29.7(2) or (3) or paragraph 31(2)(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>) shall file with the Board a proposed tariff, but no other person may file any such tariff.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;71&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;71&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Times for filing</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>A proposed tariff must be</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;71&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>in both official languages; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;71&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>filed on or before the March 31 immediately before the date that the approved tariff ceases to be effective.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;71&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;71&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where no previous tariff</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>A collective society in respect of which no proposed tariff has been certified pursuant to paragraph 73(1)(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>) shall file its proposed tariff on or before the March 31 immediately before its proposed effective date.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;71&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;71&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Effective period of tariffs</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>A proposed tariff must provide that the royalties are to be effective for periods of one or more calendar years.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., 1985, c. C-42, s. 71;</li><li> 1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;72&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;72&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Publication of proposed tariffs</MarginalNote><Label>72.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;72&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>As soon as practicable after the receipt of a proposed tariff filed pursuant to section 71, the Board shall publish it in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal> and shall give notice that, within sixty days after the publication of the tariff, educational institutions or prospective retransmitters within the meaning of subsection 31(1), or their representatives, may file written objections to the tariff with the Board.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;72&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;72&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Board to consider proposed tariffs and objections</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The Board shall, as soon as practicable, consider a proposed tariff and any objections thereto referred to in subsection (1) or raised by the Board, and</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;72&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>send to the collective society concerned a copy of the objections so as to permit it to reply; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;72&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>send to the persons who filed the objections a copy of any reply thereto.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50;</li><li> 1999, c. 31, s. 61;</li><li> 2002, c. 26, s. 3.</li></ul></HistoricalNote><a startdate="20021231">Previous Version</a></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;73&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;73&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Certification</MarginalNote><Label>73.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;73&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>On the conclusion of its consideration of proposed tariffs, the Board shall</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;73&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>establish</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;73&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>a manner of determining the royalties to be paid by educational institutions and by retransmitters within the meaning of subsection 31(1), and</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;73&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>such terms and conditions related to those royalties as the Board considers appropriate;</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;73&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>determine the portion of the royalties referred to in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) that is to be paid to each collective society;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;73&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>vary the tariffs accordingly; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;73&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>certify the tariffs as the approved tariffs, whereupon the tariffs become for the purposes of this Act the approved tariffs.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;73&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;73&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">No discrimination</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>For greater certainty, the Board, in establishing a manner of determining royalties under paragraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) or in apportioning them under paragraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>), may not discriminate between owners of copyright on the ground of their nationality or residence.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;73&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;73&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Publication of approved tariffs</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The Board shall publish the approved tariffs in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal> as soon as practicable and send a copy of each approved tariff, together with the reasons for the Board’s decision, to each collective society that filed a proposed tariff and to any person who filed an objection.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50;</li><li> 1999, c. 31, s. 62;</li><li> 2002, c. 26, s. 4.</li></ul></HistoricalNote><a startdate="20021231">Previous Version</a></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;74&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;74&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Special case</MarginalNote><Label>74.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;74&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The Board shall, in establishing a manner of determining royalties under paragraph 73(1)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>), ensure that there is a preferential rate for small retransmission systems.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;74&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;74&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The Governor in Council may make regulations defining “small retransmission systems” for the purpose of subsection (1).</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;75&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;75&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Effect of fixing royalties</MarginalNote><Label>75.</Label><Text>Without prejudice to any other remedies available to it, a collective society may, for the period specified in its approved tariff, collect the royalties specified in the tariff and, in default of their payment, recover them in a court of competent jurisdiction.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;76&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;76&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Claims by non-members</MarginalNote><Label>76.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;76&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>An owner of copyright who does not authorize a collective society to collect, for that person’s benefit, royalties referred to in paragraph 31(2)(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>) is, if the work is communicated to the public by telecommunication during a period when an approved tariff that is applicable to that kind of work is effective, entitled to be paid those royalties by the collective society that is designated by the Board, of its own motion or on application, subject to the same conditions as those to which a person who has so authorized that collective society is subject.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;76&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;76&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Royalties that may be recovered</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>An owner of copyright who does not authorize a collective society to collect, for that person’s benefit, royalties referred to in subsection 29.6(2) or 29.7(2) or (3) is, if such royalties are payable during a period when an approved tariff that is applicable to that kind of work or other subject-matter is effective, entitled to be paid those royalties by the collective society that is designated by the Board, of its own motion or on application, subject to the same conditions as those to which a person who has so authorized that collective society is subject.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;76&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;76&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exclusion of remedies</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The entitlement referred to in subsections (1) and (2) is the only remedy of the owner of the copyright for the payment of royalties for the communication, making of the copy or sound recording or performance in public, as the case may be.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;76&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;76&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>The Board may, for the purposes of this section,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;76&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>require a collective society to file with the Board information relating to payments of royalties collected by it to the persons who have authorized it to collect those royalties; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;76&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>by regulation, establish periods of not less than twelve months within which the entitlements referred to in subsections (1) and (2) must be exercised, in the case of royalties referred to in</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;76&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>paragraph 29.6(2)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>), beginning on the expiration of the year during which no royalties are payable under that paragraph,</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;76&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>paragraph 29.6(2)(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>), beginning on the performance in public,</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;76&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;iii&quot;"><Label>(iii)</Label><Text>subsection 29.7(2), beginning on the making of the copy,</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;76&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;iv&quot;"><Label>(iv)</Label><Text>subsection 29.7(3), beginning on the performance in public, or</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;76&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;,p2=&quot;v&quot;"><Label>(v)</Label><Text>paragraph 31(2)(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>), beginning on the communication to the public by telecommunication.</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_77&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_77&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Owners Who Cannot be Located</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;77&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;77&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Circumstances in which licence may be issued by Board</MarginalNote><Label>77.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;77&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Where, on application to the Board by a person who wishes to obtain a licence to use</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;77&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a published work,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;77&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a fixation of a performer’s performance,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;77&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a published sound recording, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;77&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a fixation of a communication signal</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>in which copyright subsists, the Board is satisfied that the applicant has made reasonable efforts to locate the owner of the copyright and that the owner cannot be located, the Board may issue to the applicant a licence to do an act mentioned in section 3, 15, 18 or 21, as the case may be.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;77&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;77&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Conditions of licence</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>A licence issued under subsection (1) is non-exclusive and is subject to such terms and conditions as the Board may establish.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;77&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;77&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Payment to owner</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>The owner of a copyright may, not later than five years after the expiration of a licence issued pursuant to subsection (1) in respect of the copyright, collect the royalties fixed in the licence or, in default of their payment, commence an action to recover them in a court of competent jurisdiction.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;77&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;77&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>The Copyright Board may make regulations governing the issuance of licences under subsection (1).</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_78&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_78&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Compensation for Acts Done Before Recognition of Copyright or Moral Rights</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;78&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;78&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Board may determine compensation</MarginalNote><Label>78.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;78&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to subsection (2), for the purposes of subsections 32.4(2), 32.5(2) and 33(2), the Board may, on application by any of the parties referred to in one of those provisions, determine the amount of the compensation referred to in that provision that the Board considers reasonable, having regard to all the circumstances, including any judgment of a court in an action between the parties for the enforcement of a right mentioned in subsection 32.4(3) or 32.5(3).</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;78&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;78&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The Board shall not</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;78&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>proceed with an application under subsection (1) where a notice is filed with the Board that an agreement regarding the matters in issue has been reached; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;78&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>where a court action between the parties for enforcement of a right referred to in subsection 32.4(3) or 32.5(3), as the case may be, has been commenced, continue with an application under subsection (1) until the court action is finally concluded.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;78&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;78&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Interim orders</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Where the Board proceeds with an application under subsection (1), it may, for the purpose of avoiding serious prejudice to any party, make an interim order requiring a party to refrain from doing any act described in the order until the determination of compensation is made under subsection (1).</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="1"><Label>PART VIII</Label><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">PRIVATE COPYING</TitleText></Heading><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_79&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_79&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Interpretation</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;79&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Definitions</MarginalNote><Label>79.</Label><Text>In this Part,</Text><Definition Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{audio recording medium}{support audio}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{audio recording medium}{support audio}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>audio recording medium</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{audio recording medium}{support audio}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>support audio</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>audio recording medium</DefinedTermEn> means a recording medium, regardless of its material form, onto which a sound recording may be reproduced and that is of a kind ordinarily used by individual consumers for that purpose, excluding any prescribed kind of recording medium;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{blank audio recording medium}{support audio vierge}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{blank audio recording medium}{support audio vierge}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>blank audio recording medium</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{blank audio recording medium}{support audio vierge}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>support audio vierge</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>blank audio recording medium</DefinedTermEn> means</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{blank audio recording medium}{support audio vierge}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>an audio recording medium onto which no sounds have ever been fixed, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{blank audio recording medium}{support audio vierge}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>any other prescribed audio recording medium;</Text></Paragraph></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{collecting body}{organisme de perception}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{collecting body}{organisme de perception}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>collecting body</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{collecting body}{organisme de perception}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>organisme de perception</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>collecting body</DefinedTermEn> means the collective society, or other society, association or corporation, that is designated as the collecting body under subsection 83(8);</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible author}{auteur admissible}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible author}{auteur admissible}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>eligible author</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible author}{auteur admissible}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>auteur admissible</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>eligible author</DefinedTermEn> means an author of a musical work, whether created before or after the coming into force of this Part, that is embodied in a sound recording, whether made before or after the coming into force of this Part, if copyright subsists in Canada in that musical work;</Text></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible maker}{producteur admissible}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible maker}{producteur admissible}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>eligible maker</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible maker}{producteur admissible}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>producteur admissible</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>eligible maker</DefinedTermEn> means a maker of a sound recording that embodies a musical work, whether the first fixation of the sound recording occurred before or after the coming into force of this Part, if</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible maker}{producteur admissible}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>both the following two conditions are met:</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible maker}{producteur admissible}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>the maker, at the date of that first fixation, if a corporation, had its headquarters in Canada or, if a natural person, was a Canadian citizen or permanent resident within the meaning of subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="I-2.5">Immigration and Refugee Protection Act</XRefExternal>, and</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible maker}{producteur admissible}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>copyright subsists in Canada in the sound recording, or</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible maker}{producteur admissible}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the maker, at the date of that first fixation, if a corporation, had its headquarters in a country referred to in a statement published under section 85 or, if a natural person, was a citizen, subject or permanent resident of such a country;</Text></Paragraph></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible performer}{artiste-interprète admissible}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible performer}{artiste-interprète admissible}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>eligible performer</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible performer}{artiste-interprète admissible}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermFr>artiste-interprète admissible</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>eligible performer</DefinedTermEn> means the performer of a performer’s performance of a musical work, whether it took place before or after the coming into force of this Part, if the performer’s performance is embodied in a sound recording and</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible performer}{artiste-interprète admissible}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>both the following two conditions are met:</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible performer}{artiste-interprète admissible}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>the performer was, at the date of the first fixation of the sound recording, a Canadian citizen or permanent resident within the meaning of subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="I-2.5">Immigration and Refugee Protection Act</XRefExternal>, and</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible performer}{artiste-interprète admissible}&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>copyright subsists in Canada in the performer’s performance, or</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{eligible performer}{artiste-interprète admissible}&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the performer was, at the date of the first fixation of the sound recording, a citizen, subject or permanent resident of a country referred to in a statement published under section 85;</Text></Paragraph></Definition><Definition Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{prescribed}{}&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{prescribed}{}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinedTermEn>prescribed</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;79&quot;,df=&quot;{prescribed}{}&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;"><DefinitionEnOnly>Version anglaise seulement</DefinitionEnOnly></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>prescribed</DefinedTermEn> means prescribed by regulations made under this Part.</Text></Definition><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50;</li><li> 2001, c. 27, s. 240.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_80&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_80&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Copying for Private Use</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;80&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;80&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where no infringement of copyright</MarginalNote><Label>80.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;80&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to subsection (2), the act of reproducing all or any substantial part of</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;80&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a musical work embodied in a sound recording,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;80&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a performer’s performance of a musical work embodied in a sound recording, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;80&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a sound recording in which a musical work, or a performer’s performance of a musical work, is embodied</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>onto an audio recording medium for the private use of the person who makes the copy does not constitute an infringement of the copyright in the musical work, the performer’s performance or the sound recording.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;80&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;80&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Limitation</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Subsection (1) does not apply if the act described in that subsection is done for the purpose of doing any of the following in relation to any of the things referred to in paragraphs (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) to (<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>):</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;80&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>selling or renting out, or by way of trade exposing or offering for sale or rental;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;80&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>distributing, whether or not for the purpose of trade;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;80&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>communicating to the public by telecommunication; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;80&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>performing, or causing to be performed, in public.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_81&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_81&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Right of Remuneration</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;81&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;81&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Right of remuneration</MarginalNote><Label>81.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;81&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to and in accordance with this Part, eligible authors, eligible performers and eligible makers have a right to receive remuneration from manufacturers and importers of blank audio recording media in respect of the reproduction for private use of</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;81&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a musical work embodied in a sound recording;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;81&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a performer’s performance of a musical work embodied in a sound recording; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;81&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a sound recording in which a musical work, or a performer’s performance of a musical work, is embodied.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;81&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;81&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Assignment of rights</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Subsections 13(4) to (7) apply, with such modifications as the circumstances require, in respect of the rights conferred by subsection (1) on eligible authors, performers and makers.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_82&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_82&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Levy on Blank Audio Recording Media</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;82&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;82&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Liability to pay levy</MarginalNote><Label>82.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;82&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Every person who, for the purpose of trade, manufactures a blank audio recording medium in Canada or imports a blank audio recording medium into Canada</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;82&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>is liable, subject to subsection (2) and section 86, to pay a levy to the collecting body on selling or otherwise disposing of those blank audio recording media in Canada; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;82&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>shall, in accordance with subsection 83(8), keep statements of account of the activities referred to in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>), as well as of exports of those blank audio recording media, and shall furnish those statements to the collecting body.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;82&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;82&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">No levy for exports</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>No levy is payable where it is a term of the sale or other disposition of the blank audio recording medium that the medium is to be exported from Canada, and it is exported from Canada.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;83&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Filing of proposed tariffs</MarginalNote><Label>83.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to subsection (14), each collective society may file with the Board a proposed tariff for the benefit of those eligible authors, eligible performers and eligible makers who, by assignment, grant of licence, appointment of the society as their agent or otherwise, authorize it to act on their behalf for that purpose, but no person other than a collective society may file any such tariff.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Collecting body</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Without limiting the generality of what may be included in a proposed tariff, the tariff may include a suggestion as to whom the Board should designate under paragraph (8)(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>) as the collecting body.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Times for filing</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Proposed tariffs must be in both official languages and must be filed on or before the March 31 immediately before the date when the approved tariffs cease to be effective.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where no previous tariff</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>A collective society in respect of which no proposed tariff has been certified pursuant to paragraph (8)(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>) shall file its proposed tariff on or before the March 31 immediately before its proposed effective date.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;5&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Effective period of levies</MarginalNote><Label>(5)</Label><Text>A proposed tariff must provide that the levies are to be effective for periods of one or more calendar years.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;6&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Publication of proposed tariffs</MarginalNote><Label>(6)</Label><Text>As soon as practicable after the receipt of a proposed tariff filed pursuant to subsection (1), the Board shall publish it in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal> and shall give notice that, within sixty days after the publication of the tariff, any person may file written objections to the tariff with the Board.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Board to consider proposed tariffs and objections</MarginalNote><Label>(7)</Label><Text>The Board shall, as soon as practicable, consider a proposed tariff and any objections thereto referred to in subsection (6) or raised by the Board, and</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>send to the collective society concerned a copy of the objections so as to permit it to reply; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;7&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>send to the persons who filed the objections a copy of any reply thereto.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;8&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;8&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Duties of Board</MarginalNote><Label>(8)</Label><Text>On the conclusion of its consideration of the proposed tariff, the Board shall</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;8&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>establish, in accordance with subsection (9),</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;8&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>the manner of determining the levies, and</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;8&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>such terms and conditions related to those levies as the Board considers appropriate, including, without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the form, content and frequency of the statements of account mentioned in subsection 82(1), measures for the protection of confidential information contained in those statements, and the times at which the levies are payable,</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;8&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>vary the tariff accordingly,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;8&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>certify the tariff as the approved tariff, whereupon that tariff becomes for the purposes of this Part the approved tariff, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;8&quot;,p1=&quot;d&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>designate as the collecting body the collective society or other society, association or corporation that, in the Board’s opinion, will best fulfil the objects of sections 82, 84 and 86,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>but the Board is not obligated to exercise its power under paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>) if it has previously done so, and a designation under that paragraph remains in effect until the Board makes another designation, which it may do at any time whatsoever, on application.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;9&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;9&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Factors Board to consider</MarginalNote><Label>(9)</Label><Text>In exercising its power under paragraph (8)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>), the Board shall satisfy itself that the levies are fair and equitable, having regard to any prescribed criteria.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;10&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;10&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Publication of approved tariffs</MarginalNote><Label>(10)</Label><Text>The Board shall publish the approved tariffs in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal> as soon as practicable and shall send a copy of each approved tariff, together with the reasons for the Board’s decision, to the collecting body, to each collective society that filed a proposed tariff, and to any person who filed an objection.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;11&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;11&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Authors, etc., not represented by collective society</MarginalNote><Label>(11)</Label><Text>An eligible author, eligible performer or eligible maker who does not authorize a collective society to file a proposed tariff under subsection (1) is entitled, in relation to</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;11&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a musical work,</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;11&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a performer’s performance of a musical work, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;11&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a sound recording in which a musical work, or a performer’s performance of a musical work, is embodied,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>as the case may be, to be paid by the collective society that is designated by the Board, of the Board’s own motion or on application, the remuneration referred to in section 81 if such remuneration is payable during a period when an approved tariff that is applicable to that kind of work, performer’s performance or sound recording is effective, subject to the same conditions as those to which a person who has so authorized that collective society is subject.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;12&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;12&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Exclusion of other remedies</MarginalNote><Label>(12)</Label><Text>The entitlement referred to in subsection (11) is the only remedy of the eligible author, eligible performer or eligible maker referred to in that subsection in respect of the reproducing of sound recordings for private use.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;13&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;13&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Powers of Board</MarginalNote><Label>(13)</Label><Text>The Board may, for the purposes of subsections (11) and (12),</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;13&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>require a collective society to file with the Board information relating to payments of moneys received by the society pursuant to section 84 to the persons who have authorized it to file a tariff under subsection (1); and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;13&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>by regulation, establish the periods, which shall not be less than twelve months, beginning when the applicable approved tariff ceases to be effective, within which the entitlement referred to in subsection (11) must be exercised.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;14&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;83&quot;,ss=&quot;14&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Single proposed tariff</MarginalNote><Label>(14)</Label><Text>Where all the collective societies that intend to file a proposed tariff authorize a particular person or body to file a single proposed tariff on their behalf, that person or body may do so, and in that case this section applies, with such modifications as the circumstances require, in respect of that proposed tariff.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_84&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_84&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Distribution of Levies Paid</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;84&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;84&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Distribution by collecting body</MarginalNote><Label>84.</Label><Text>As soon as practicable after receiving the levies paid to it, the collecting body shall distribute the levies to the collective societies representing eligible authors, eligible performers and eligible makers, in the proportions fixed by the Board.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;85&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;85&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Reciprocity</MarginalNote><Label>85.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;85&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Where the Minister is of the opinion that another country grants or has undertaken to grant to performers and makers of sound recordings that are Canadian citizens or permanent residents within the meaning of subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="I-2.5">Immigration and Refugee Protection Act</XRefExternal> or, if corporations, have their headquarters in Canada, as the case may be, whether by treaty, convention, agreement or law, benefits substantially equivalent to those conferred by this Part, the Minister may, by a statement published in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal>,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;85&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>grant the benefits conferred by this Part to performers or makers of sound recordings that are citizens, subjects or permanent residents of or, if corporations, have their headquarters in that country; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;85&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>declare that that country shall, as regards those benefits, be treated as if it were a country to which this Part extends.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;85&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;85&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Reciprocity</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where the Minister is of the opinion that another country neither grants nor has undertaken to grant to performers or makers of sound recordings that are Canadian citizens or permanent residents within the meaning of subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="I-2.5">Immigration and Refugee Protection Act</XRefExternal> or, if corporations, have their headquarters in Canada, as the case may be, whether by treaty, convention, agreement or law, benefits substantially equivalent to those conferred by this Part, the Minister may, by a statement published in the <XRefExternal reference-type="other" link="gazette">Canada Gazette</XRefExternal>,</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;85&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>grant the benefits conferred by this Part to performers or makers of sound recordings that are citizens, subjects or permanent residents of or, if corporations, have their headquarters in that country, as the case may be, to the extent that that country grants those benefits to performers or makers of sound recordings that are Canadian citizens or permanent residents within the meaning of subsection 2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act" link="I-2.5">Immigration and Refugee Protection Act</XRefExternal> or, if corporations, have their headquarters in Canada; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;85&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>declare that that country shall, as regards those benefits, be treated as if it were a country to which this Part extends.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;85&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;85&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application of Act</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Any provision of this Act that the Minister specifies in a statement referred to in subsection (1) or (2)</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;85&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>applies in respect of performers or makers of sound recordings covered by that statement, as if they were citizens of or, if corporations, had their headquarters in Canada; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;85&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>applies in respect of a country covered by that statement, as if that country were Canada.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;85&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;85&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Application of Act</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Subject to any exceptions that the Minister may specify in a statement referred to in subsection (1) or (2), the other provisions of this Act also apply in the way described in subsection (3).</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50;</li><li> 2001, c. 27, s. 241.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_86&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_86&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Exemption from Levy</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;86&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;86&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Where no levy payable</MarginalNote><Label>86.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;86&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>No levy is payable under this Part where the manufacturer or importer of a blank audio recording medium sells or otherwise disposes of it to a society, association or corporation that represents persons with a perceptual disability.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;86&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;86&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Refunds</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where a society, association or corporation referred to in subsection (1)</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;86&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>purchases a blank audio recording medium in Canada from a person other than the manufacturer or importer, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;86&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>provides the collecting body with proof of that purchase, on or before June 30 in the calendar year following the calendar year in which the purchase was made,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>the collecting body is liable to pay forthwith to the society, association or corporation an amount equal to the amount of the levy paid in respect of the blank audio recording medium purchased.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;86&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;86&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">If registration system exists</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>If regulations made under paragraph 87(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) provide for the registration of societies, associations or corporations that represent persons with a perceptual disability, subsections (1) and (2) shall be read as referring to societies, associations or corporations that are so registered.</Text></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_87&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_87&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;87&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;87&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Regulations</MarginalNote><Label>87.</Label><Text>The Governor in Council may make regulations</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;87&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>respecting the exemptions and refunds provided for in section 86, including, without limiting the generality of the foregoing,</Text><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;87&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;i&quot;"><Label>(i)</Label><Text>regulations respecting procedures governing those exemptions and refunds,</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;87&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;ii&quot;"><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>regulations respecting applications for those exemptions and refunds, and</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph Code="se=&quot;87&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;,p2=&quot;iii&quot;"><Label>(iii)</Label><Text>regulations for the registration of societies, associations or corporations that represent persons with a perceptual disability;</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;87&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>prescribing anything that by this Part is to be prescribed; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;87&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>generally for carrying out the purposes and provisions of this Part.</Text></Paragraph><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_88&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="2"><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_VIII&quot;,gb=&quot;s_88&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">Civil Remedies</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;88&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;88&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Right of recovery</MarginalNote><Label>88.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;88&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Without prejudice to any other remedies available to it, the collecting body may, for the period specified in an approved tariff, collect the levies due to it under the tariff and, in default of their payment, recover them in a court of competent jurisdiction.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;88&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;88&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Failure to pay royalties</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The court may order a person who fails to pay any levy due under this Part to pay an amount not exceeding five times the amount of the levy to the collecting body. The collecting body must distribute the payment in the manner set out in section 84.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;88&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;88&quot;,ss=&quot;3&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Order directing compliance</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Where any obligation imposed by this Part is not complied with, the collecting body may, in addition to any other remedy available, apply to a court of competent jurisdiction for an order directing compliance with that obligation.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;88&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;88&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Factors to consider</MarginalNote><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Before making an order under subsection (2), the court must take into account</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;88&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>whether the person who failed to pay the levy acted in good faith or bad faith;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;88&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the conduct of the parties before and during the proceedings; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;88&quot;,ss=&quot;4&quot;,p1=&quot;c&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the need to deter persons from failing to pay levies.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Heading Code="ga=&quot;l_IX&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;" level="1"><Label>PART IX</Label><TitleText Code="ga=&quot;l_IX&quot;,h1=&quot;&quot;,t1=&quot;&quot;">GENERAL PROVISIONS</TitleText></Heading><Section Code="se=&quot;89&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;89&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">No copyright, etc., except by statute</MarginalNote><Label>89.</Label><Text>No person is entitled to copyright otherwise than under and in accordance with this Act or any other Act of Parliament, but nothing in this section shall be construed as abrogating any right or jurisdiction in respect of a breach of trust or confidence.</Text><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;90&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;90&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Interpretation</MarginalNote><Label>90.</Label><Text>No provision of this Act relating to</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;90&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>copyright in performer’s performances, sound recordings or communication signals, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;90&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the right of performers or makers to remuneration</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>shall be construed as prejudicing any rights conferred by Part I or, in and of itself, as prejudicing the amount of royalties that the Board may fix in respect of those rights.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;91&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;91&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Adherence to Berne and Rome Conventions</MarginalNote><Label>91.</Label><Text>The Governor in Council shall take such measures as are necessary to secure the adherence of Canada to</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;91&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the Convention for the Protection of Literary and Artistic Works concluded at Berne on September 9, 1886, as revised by the Paris Act of 1971; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;91&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the International Convention for the Protection of Performers, Producers of Phonograms and Broadcasting Organisations, done at Rome on October 26, 1961.</Text></Paragraph><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section><Section Code="se=&quot;92&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;92&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Review of Act</MarginalNote><Label>92.</Label><Subsection Code="se=&quot;92&quot;,ss=&quot;1&quot;"><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Within five years after the coming into force of this section, the Minister shall cause to be laid before both Houses of Parliament a report on the provisions and operation of this Act, including any recommendations for amendments to this Act.</Text></Subsection><Subsection Code="se=&quot;92&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;"><MarginalNote Code="se=&quot;92&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,m1=&quot;&quot;">Reference to parliamentary committee</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The report stands referred to the committee of the House of Commons, or of both Houses of Parliament, that is designated or established for that purpose, which shall</Text><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;92&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;a&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>as soon as possible thereafter, review the report and undertake a comprehensive review of the provisions and operation of this Act; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph Code="se=&quot;92&quot;,ss=&quot;2&quot;,p1=&quot;b&quot;"><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>report to the House of Commons, or to both Houses of Parliament, within one year after the laying of the report of the Minister or any further time that the House of Commons, or both Houses of Parliament, may authorize.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><HistoricalNote><ul><li>1997, c. 24, s. 50.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Section></Body><Schedule bilingual="no" spanlanguages="no" Code="sc=&quot;&quot;,nb=&quot;1&quot;"><ScheduleFormHeading><Label>SCHEDULE I</Label><OriginatingRef>(Section 60)</OriginatingRef><TitleText>EXISTING RIGHTS</TitleText></ScheduleFormHeading><TableGroup bilingual="no" pointsize="9" rowbreak="no" spanlanguages="no" spanmarginalnotecol="no"><table colsep="0" frame="topbot" rowsep="0"><tgroup cols="2"><colspec colname="1" colnum="1" colwidth="2.45*" htmlwidth="50%" /><colspec colname="2" colnum="2" colwidth="2.49*" htmlwidth="50%" /><thead><row topdouble="yes" topmarginspacing="2" valign="middle"><entry align="center" colsep="1" rowsep="0" valign="top" id="t819h0">Column I</entry><entry align="center" colsep="1" rowsep="0" id="t819h1">Column II</entry></row><row topmarginspacing="2"><entry align="center" colsep="1" rowsep="1" valign="top" id="t819h2">Existing Right</entry><entry align="center" rowsep="1" valign="top" id="t819h3">Substituted Right</entry></row><row rowsep="0"><entry nameend="2" namest="1" id="t819h4"></entry></row></thead><tbody><row topmarginspacing="2"><entry align="center" colname="1" nameend="2" namest="1" rowsep="0" headers="t819h0 t819h1 t819h2 t819h3"><Emphasis style="italic">Works other than Dramatic and Musical Works</Emphasis></entry></row><row topmarginspacing="2"><entry colname="1" colsep="1" rowsep="0" headers="t819h0 t819h2"><Provision format-ref="indent-0-1" language-align="no"><Text>Copyright</Text></Provision></entry><entry colname="2" colsep="1" rowsep="0" headers="t819h1 t819h3"><Provision format-ref="indent-0-1" language-align="no"><Text>Copyright as defined by this Act<FootnoteRef idref="fn_Ind1939_hq_8946">1</FootnoteRef>.</Text></Provision></entry></row><row topmarginspacing="2"><entry align="center" colname="1" nameend="2" namest="1" rowsep="0" headers="t819h0 t819h1 t819h2 t819h3"><Emphasis style="italic">Musical and Dramatic Works</Emphasis></entry></row><row topmarginspacing="2"><entry colname="1" colsep="1" rowsep="0" headers="t819h0 t819h2"><Provision format-ref="indent-0-1" language-align="no"><Text>Both copyright and performing right</Text></Provision></entry><entry colname="2" colsep="1" rowsep="0" headers="t819h1 t819h3"><Provision format-ref="indent-0-1" language-align="no"><Text>Copyright as defined by this Act.</Text></Provision></entry></row><row topmarginspacing="2"><entry colname="1" colsep="1" rowsep="0" headers="t819h0 t819h2"><Provision format-ref="indent-0-1" language-align="no"><Text>Copyright, but not performing right</Text></Provision></entry><entry colname="2" colsep="1" rowsep="0" headers="t819h1 t819h3"><Provision format-ref="indent-0-1" language-align="no"><Text>Copyright as defined by this Act, except the sole right to perform the work or any substantial part thereof in public.</Text></Provision></entry></row><row topmarginspacing="2"><entry colname="1" colsep="1" rowsep="0" headers="t819h0 t819h2"><Provision format-ref="indent-0-1" language-align="no"><Text>Performing right, but not copyright</Text></Provision></entry><entry colname="2" colsep="1" rowsep="0" headers="t819h1 t819h3"><Provision format-ref="indent-0-1" language-align="no"><Text>The sole right to perform the work in public, but none of the other rights comprised in copyright as defined by this Act.</Text></Provision></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></table><Footnote id="fn_Ind1939_hq_8946" placement="table" status="official"><Label>1</Label><Text> In the case of an essay, article or portion forming part of and first published in a review, magazine or other periodical or work of a like nature, the right shall be subject to any right of publishing the essay, article or portion in a separate form to which the author is entitled on January 1, 1924 or would if this Act had not been passed have become entitled under section 18 of <XRefExternal reference-type="act">An Act to amend the Law of Copyright</XRefExternal>, being chapter 45 of the Statutes of the United Kingdom, 1842.</Text></Footnote></TableGroup><Provision format-ref="indent-1-0" language-align="no"><Text>For the purposes of this Schedule the following expressions, where used in column I thereof, have the following meanings:</Text></Provision><Provision format-ref="indent-0-1" language-align="no"><Text><DefinedTermEn>Copyright</DefinedTermEn> in the case of a work that according to the law in force immediately before January 1, 1924 has not been published before that date and statutory copyright wherein depends on publication, includes the right at common law, if any, to restrain publication or other dealing with the work;</Text></Provision><Provision format-ref="indent-0-1" language-align="no"><Text><DefinedTermEn>Performing right</DefinedTermEn>, in the case of a work that has not been performed in public before January 1, 1924, includes the right at common law, if any, to restrain the performance thereof in public.</Text></Provision><HistoricalNote><ul><li>R.S., c. C-30, Sch. I;</li><li> 1976-77, c. 28, s. 10.</li></ul></HistoricalNote></Schedule><Schedule spanlanguages="no" bilingual="no" Code="sc=&quot;&quot;,nb=&quot;2&quot;"><ScheduleFormHeading><Label>SCHEDULE II</Label></ScheduleFormHeading><Repealed>[Repealed, 1993, c. 44, s. 74]</Repealed></Schedule><Schedule spanlanguages="no" bilingual="no" Code="sc=&quot;&quot;,nb=&quot;3&quot;"><ScheduleFormHeading><Label>SCHEDULE III</Label></ScheduleFormHeading><Repealed>[Repealed, 1997, c. 24, s. 51]</Repealed></Schedule><Schedule id="RelatedProvs"><ScheduleFormHeading type="amending"><TitleText>RELATED PROVISIONS</TitleText></ScheduleFormHeading><BillPiece><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), ss. 23 to 27</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label /><Text /><AmendedText include-in-TableOfProvisions="no"><ReadAsText><Section><MarginalNote>Application re moral rights</MarginalNote><Label>23.</Label><Subsection><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The rights referred to in section 14.1 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by section 4, subsist in respect of a work even if the work was created before the coming into force of section 4.</Text></Subsection><Subsection><MarginalNote>Restriction</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>A remedy referred to in subsection 34(1.1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by section 8, may only be obtained where the infringement of the moral rights of the author occurs after the coming into force of section 8.</Text></Subsection><Subsection><MarginalNote>Idem</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Notwithstanding subsection (1) and the repeal by section 3 of subsection 14(4) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, the rights referred to in section 14.1 of that Act, as enacted by section 4, are not enforceable against</Text><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a person who, on the coming into force of this section, is the owner of the copyright in, or holds a licence in relation to, a work, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a person authorized by a person described in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) to do an act mentioned in section 3 of that Act,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>in respect of any thing done during the period for which the person described in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) is the owner or for which the licence is in force, and the rights referred to in subsection 14(4) of that Act continue to be enforceable against a person described in paragraph (<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) or (<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>) during that period as if subsection 14(4) of that Act were not repealed.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection></Section></ReadAsText></AmendedText></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), ss. 23 to 27</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label /><Text /><AmendedText include-in-TableOfProvisions="no"><ReadAsText><Section><MarginalNote>Application re computer programs</MarginalNote><Label>24.</Label><Text>Subsection 1(2), the definition “computer program” in subsection 1(3) and section 5 apply in respect of a computer program that was made prior to the day on which those provisions come into force but where, by virtue only of subsections 1(2) and (3) and this section, copyright subsists in a computer program that was made prior to May 27, 1987, nothing done in respect of the computer program before May 27, 1987 shall be construed to constitute an infringement of the copyright.</Text></Section></ReadAsText></AmendedText></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), ss. 23 to 27</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label /><Text /><AmendedText include-in-TableOfProvisions="no"><ReadAsText><Section><MarginalNote>Making of records, perforated rolls, etc.</MarginalNote><Label>25.</Label><Text>It shall be deemed not to be an infringement of copyright in any musical, literary or dramatic work for any person to make within Canada during the six months following the coming into force of section 7 records, perforated rolls or other contrivances by means of which sounds may be reproduced and by means of which the work may be mechanically performed, if the person proves</Text><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>that before the coming into force of section 7, the person made such contrivances in respect of that work in accordance with section 29 or 30 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal> and any regulation made under section 33 of that Act, as they read immediately before the coming into force of section 7; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>that the making would, had it occurred before the coming into force of section 7, have been deemed not to have been an infringement of copyright by section 29 or 30 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as it read immediately before the coming into force of section 7.</Text></Paragraph></Section></ReadAsText></AmendedText></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), ss. 23 to 27</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label /><Text /><AmendedText include-in-TableOfProvisions="no"><ReadAsText><Section><MarginalNote>Infringements before coming into force</MarginalNote><Label>26.</Label><Text>Subsection 64(1) and section 64.1 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by section 11, apply in respect of any alleged infringement of copyright occurring prior to, on or after the day on which section 11 comes into force.</Text></Section></ReadAsText></AmendedText></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — R.S., 1985, c. 10 (4th Supp.), ss. 23 to 27</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label /><Text /><AmendedText include-in-TableOfProvisions="no"><ReadAsText><Section><MarginalNote>Continuation in office</MarginalNote><Label>27.</Label><Text>Notwithstanding any other provision of this Act, the members of the Copyright Appeal Board appointed pursuant to section 68 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as it read immediately before the coming into force of section 13, continue in office and may continue to perform their duties and exercise their powers to the extent necessary to consider and deal with any matter before it pursuant to section 69 of that Act before the coming into force of section 14.</Text></Section></ReadAsText></AmendedText></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1988, c. 65, s. 149</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label /><Text /><AmendedText include-in-TableOfProvisions="no"><ReadAsText><Section><MarginalNote>First certified statements of royalties</MarginalNote><Label>149.</Label><Text>For greater certainty, the royalties in the first statements certified under paragraph 70.63(1)(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal> become effective on January 1, 1990 regardless of when the statements are so certified.</Text></Section></ReadAsText></AmendedText></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1993, c. 23, ss. 6, 7</TitleText></Heading><Section><MarginalNote>Transitional: Statements of royalties</MarginalNote><Label>6.</Label><Subsection><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Notwithstanding section 67 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, a statement filed with the Copyright Board pursuant to subsection 67(2) or (3) of that Act on or before September 1, 1992</Text><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>may provide, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>may be amended with leave of the Board, if application therefor is made to the Board within twenty-eight days after the coming into force of this Act, to provide</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text> for the payment of royalties, for the period beginning on the coming into force of this Act and ending at the end of 1993, in respect of the communication of dramatico-musical or musical works to the public by telecommunication, and a statement so filed or amended is effective for that period to the extent that the Board certifies it as approved pursuant to subsection 67.2(1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection><Subsection><MarginalNote>No duplication of royalties</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where a statement referred to in subsection (1) is certified as approved, the Board shall not certify as approved any other statement filed by the same applicant, to the extent that it provides for royalties in respect of the same act and for the same period as set out in the statement previously certified as approved.</Text></Subsection></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1993, c. 23, ss. 6, 7</TitleText></Heading><Section><MarginalNote>Where this Act does not apply</MarginalNote><Label>7.</Label><Text>This Act does not apply in respect of statements filed with the Board pursuant to subsection 67(2) or (3) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal> on or before September 1, 1991 that relate to any year before 1993.</Text></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1993, c. 44, ss. 60(2), (3)</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label /><Subsection><MarginalNote>Application of amendments to s. 10</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Subject to subsection 75(2) of this Act, section 10 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by subsection (1) of this section, applies to all photographs, whether made before or after the coming into force of this section.</Text></Subsection></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1993, c. 44, ss. 60(2), (3)</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label /><Subsection><MarginalNote>Application of amendments to s. 11</MarginalNote><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Except as provided by section 75 of this Act,</Text><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>section 11 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by subsection (1) of this section, applies only in respect of contrivances made after the coming into force of this section; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>section 11 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as it read immediately before the coming into force of this section, continues to apply in respect of contrivances made before the coming into force of this section.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1993, c. 44, ss. 75 to 77</TitleText></Heading><Section><MarginalNote>Application of certain amendments</MarginalNote><Label>75.</Label><Subsection><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Subject to subsection (2), amendments to the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal> made by this Act relating to the term of copyright apply in respect of all works, whether made before or after the coming into force of this section.</Text></Subsection><Subsection><MarginalNote>Idem</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Where the term of the copyright in a work expires before the coming into force of this section, nothing in this Act shall be construed as extending or reviving that term.</Text></Subsection></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1993, c. 44, ss. 75 to 77</TitleText></Heading><Section><MarginalNote>Cinematographs</MarginalNote><Label>76.</Label><Subsection><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Except as provided by subsection (2) of this section, the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as amended by this Act, applies in respect of all cinematographs, whether made before or after the coming into force of this section, subject to subsection 75(2) of this Act.</Text></Subsection><Subsection><MarginalNote>Idem</MarginalNote><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Section 10 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as that section read immediately before the coming into force of this section and in so far as it governs who is the author of a photograph, continues to apply in respect of all cinematographs made before the coming into force of this section that were, before the coming into force of this section, protected as photographs.</Text></Subsection></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1993, c. 44, ss. 75 to 77</TitleText></Heading><Section><MarginalNote>Application of section 5</MarginalNote><Label>77.</Label><Text>Nothing in section 5 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as amended by this Act, confers copyright on works made before the coming into force of this section that did not qualify for copyright under section 5 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal> as it read immediately before the coming into force of this section.</Text></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1997, c. 24, s. 18(2)</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label /><Subsection><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Section 30 of the Act, as enacted by subsection (1) of this section, does not apply in respect of collections referred to in section 30 that are published before the coming into force of section 30. Such collections continue to be governed by paragraph 27(2)(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>) of the Act as it read before the coming into force of section 15 of this Act.</Text></Subsection></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1997, c. 24, ss. 20(3), (4)</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label /><Subsection><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Section 38.1 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by subsection (1) of this section, only applies</Text><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to proceedings commenced after the date of the coming into force of that subsection; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>where the infringement to which those proceedings relate occurred after that date.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1997, c. 24, ss. 20(3), (4)</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label /><Subsection><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Section 39.1 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by subsection (1) of this section, applies in respect of</Text><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>proceedings commenced but not concluded before the coming into force of subsection (1) of this section; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>proceedings commenced after the coming into force of subsection (1) of this section.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1997, c. 24, s. 22(2)</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label /><Subsection><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Subsection (1) applies in respect of</Text><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>proceedings commenced but not concluded before this section comes into force; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>proceedings commenced after this section comes into force.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1997, c. 24, ss. 53 to 58.1</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label>53.</Label><Text>The levies in the first tariffs certified under paragraph 83(8)(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by section 50 of this Act, become effective at the beginning of the first calendar year following the coming into force of that paragraph, regardless of when the tariffs are so certified, and are effective for a period of two calendar years.</Text></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1997, c. 24, ss. 53 to 58.1</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label>53.1</Label><Text>Notwithstanding subsection 67.1(2) and section 70.13 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by sections 45 and 46 of this Act, the date for the filing of the first proposed tariffs under those sections shall be on or before September 1 of the year of the coming into force of this section.</Text></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1997, c. 24, ss. 53 to 58.1</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label>54.</Label><Text>For greater certainty, all notices published under subsection 5(2) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal> before the coming into force of this section are deemed to have been validly made and to have had force and effect in accordance with their terms.</Text></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1997, c. 24, ss. 53 to 58.1</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label>54.1</Label><Text>Section 6 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal> applies to a photograph in which copyright subsists on the date of the coming into force of this section, if the author is</Text><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>a natural person who is the author of the photograph referred to in subsection 10(2) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by section 7 of this Act; or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the natural person referred to in subsection 10(1.1) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by section 7 of this Act.</Text></Paragraph></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1997, c. 24, ss. 53 to 58.1</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label>55.</Label><Subsection><Label>(1)</Label><Text>Part II of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by section 14 of this Act, shall be construed as a replacement for subsections 5(3) to (6) and section 11 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal> as those provisions read immediately before the coming into force of subsection 5(3) and section 8, respectively, of this Act.</Text></Subsection><Subsection><Label>(2)</Label><Text>The rights conferred by Part II of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by section 14 of this Act, shall not be construed as diminishing the rights conferred by subsections 5(3) to (6) and section 11 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal> as those provisions read immediately before the coming into force of subsection 5(3) and section 8, respectively, of this Act, in relation to records, perforated rolls and other contrivances by means of which sounds may be mechanically reproduced that were made before the coming into force of subsection 5(3) and section 8, respectively, of this Act.</Text></Subsection><Subsection><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Where an assignment of copyright or a grant of any interest therein</Text><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>was made before the coming into force of Part II of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by section 14 of this Act, and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>was made by the maker of a sound recording who was a natural person,</Text></Paragraph><ContinuedSectionSubsection><Text>subsections 14(1) and (2) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal> continue to apply in respect of that assignment or grant, with such modifications as the circumstances require, as if the sound recording was the work referred to in those subsections and the maker of the sound recording was its author.</Text></ContinuedSectionSubsection></Subsection></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1997, c. 24, ss. 53 to 58.1</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label>56.</Label><Text>Nothing in this Act shall be construed as diminishing the right conferred by section 14.01 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal> as that section read immediately before the coming into force of section 12 of this Act.</Text></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1997, c. 24, ss. 53 to 58.1</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label>57.</Label><Text>For greater certainty, the amendments to the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal> that eliminate references to “British subject” and “Her Majesty’s Realms and Territories” do not affect any copyright or moral rights that subsisted in Canada immediately before the coming into force of those amendments.</Text></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1997, c. 24, ss. 53 to 58.1</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label>58.</Label><Text>Nothing in this Act shall be construed as reviving a copyright that expired before the coming into force of this section.</Text></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1997, c. 24, ss. 53 to 58.1</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label>58.1</Label><Text>No agreement concluded before April 25, 1996 that assigns a right or grants an interest by licence in a right that would be a copyright or a right to remuneration under this Act shall be construed as assigning or granting any rights conferred for the first time by this Act, unless the agreement specifically provides for the assignment or grant.</Text></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1997, c. 24, ss. 62, 63</TitleText></Heading><Section><MarginalNote>Coming into force</MarginalNote><Label>62.</Label><Subsection><Label>(1)</Label><Text>The following provisions come into force or are deemed to have come into force on June 30, 1996:</Text><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the definitions “exclusive distributor”, “educational institution” and “library, archive or museum” in section 2 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by subsection 1(5) of this Act;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>section 2.6 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by section 2 of this Act;</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">c</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>section 27.1 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by section 15 of this Act; and</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>section 45 of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by section 28 of this Act.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection><Label>(2)</Label><Text>Notwithstanding subsection (1), the definition “exclusive distributor” referred to in paragraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>) shall be read as follows during the period beginning on June 30, 1996 and ending on the day that is sixty days after the day on which this Act is assented to:</Text><AmendedText include-in-TableOfProvisions="no"><SectionPiece><Definition><MarginalNote><DefinedTermEn>exclusive distributor</DefinedTermEn></MarginalNote><MarginalNote><DefinedTermFr>distributeur exclusif</DefinedTermFr></MarginalNote><Text><DefinedTermEn>exclusive distributor</DefinedTermEn> means, in relation to a book, a person who has, before or after the coming into force of this definition, been appointed in writing, by the owner or exclusive licensee of the copyright in the book in Canada, as</Text><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the only distributor of the book in Canada or any part of Canada, or</Text></Paragraph><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>the only distributor of the book in Canada or any part of Canada in respect of a particular sector of the market.</Text></Paragraph></Definition></SectionPiece></AmendedText></Subsection><Subsection><Label>(3)</Label><Text>Notwithstanding paragraph (1)(<Emphasis style="italic">d</Emphasis>), paragraph 45(1)(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>) of the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal>, as enacted by section 28 of this Act, shall be read as follows for the period beginning on June 30, 1996 and ending on the day that is sixty days after the day on which this Act is assented to:</Text><AmendedText include-in-TableOfProvisions="no"><SectionPiece><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">e</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>to import copies, made with the consent of the owner of the copyright in the country where they were made, of any used books.</Text></Paragraph></SectionPiece></AmendedText></Subsection></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 1997, c. 24, ss. 62, 63</TitleText></Heading><Section><Label>63.</Label><Subsection><Label>(1)</Label><Text>No exclusive distributor, within the meaning assigned to that expression by subsection 62(2) of this Act, copyright owner or exclusive licensee is entitled to a remedy referred to in the <XRefExternal reference-type="act">Copyright Act</XRefExternal> in relation to an infringement referred to in subsection 27.1(1) or (2) of that Act, as enacted by section 15 of this Act, during the period beginning on June 30, 1996 and ending on the day on which this Act is assented to, unless</Text><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">a</Emphasis>)</Label><Text>before the infringement occurred, notice in writing has been given to the person referred to in subsection 27.1(1) or (2) of that Act, as enacted by section 15 of this Act, as the case may be, that</Text><Subparagraph><Label>(i)</Label><Text>there is an exclusive distributor of the book in Canada, and</Text></Subparagraph><Subparagraph><Label>(ii)</Label><Text>section 27.1 of that Act came into force or was deemed to have come into force on June 30, 1996; and</Text></Subparagraph></Paragraph><Paragraph><Label>(<Emphasis style="italic">b</Emphasis>)</Label><Text> in the case of an infringement referred to in section 27.1 of that Act, as enacted by section 15 of this Act, the remedy is only in relation to a book that was imported during that period and forms part of the inventory of the person referred to in section 27.1 of that Act on the day on which this Act is assented to.</Text></Paragraph></Subsection><Subsection><Label>(2)</Label><Text>No exclusive distributor, copyright owner or exclusive licensee is entitled to a remedy referred to in subsection (1) against an educational institution, library, archive or museum.</Text></Subsection><Subsection><Label>(3)</Label><Text>For greater certainty, the expiration of the period referred to in subsection 62(2) of this Act does not affect the right of an exclusive distributor to continue, after the expiration of that period, legal proceedings validly commenced during that period.</Text></Subsection></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce><RelatedOrNotInForce><Heading level="5" style="nifrp"><TitleText>
                    — 2004, c. 11, s. 21(4)</TitleText></Heading><Section><MarginalNote>Application</MarginalNote><Label>21.</Label><Subsection><Label>(4)</Label><Text>Subsection (1) applies in respect of unpublished works deposited in an archive on or before September 1, 1999 or at any time after that date.</Text></Subsection></Section></RelatedOrNotInForce></BillPiece></Schedule></Statute>
